EPIC 1000 Day SURVIVAL ISLAND CHALLENGE: Hardcore Minecraft 1.20 (FULL MOVIE)

Video Information

Hi 1 year ago this week on January the 20th 2023 I uploaded I survived 100 days on a survival island in 1.20 the series did so well I ended up making six separate videos on the island plus a separate spin-off with my friends now with the beginnings of 1.21 beginning to

Come out a new 1.21 Survival Island series will be in the works and so as a send off to this great series I decided to merge this entire series together into one 5.5 that 5.5 you serious so whether you have a lot of time to kill need something to play in the background

While she’s studying or whatever or if you just love me that much to enjoy this all in one sitting you can sit back enjoy and go ahead and leave us a like and a subscription if you’d like to as well all right then let’s do this Minecraft has always been a game of

Endless Possibilities an infinite World with infinite blocks crops and animals but where’s the fun in that this is the survival island challenge and it’s simple you pick an island and you don’t leave use the little wood animals and crops that you could find but again that’s too easy I found myself an island

That has no wood no animals no CR and I’m going to survive 100 days on it in hardcore mode if you go to enjoy the video please consider likeing and comenting and maybe you could consider subscribing as well I’d very much appreciate it all right then let’s have

A nice little review of my Island over here you’ll see the turtles no bigger this is uh Jerry Frank and cub and remember that that’ll be on the test got some nice sugar cane growing over here some more sugarcan growing over here this one’s Dylan this one’s Carl oh look

At that there’s some there’s some more Sho King gring over there and um yeah I have to survive here luckily I have one item with me what item that’s going to save the bamboo how in the world is bamboo going to help what I’m going to

Do turn it into sticks and eat sticks that’ be a terrible meal so if you haven’t been keeping up the track with the new additions to 1.20 one of them is now new bamboo wood four bamboo equals one bamboo plank which means I’ll have wood and now we wait well whil we

Waiting when may will grab ourselves some sugarcane never know what you could do with that and I’m already down some food great now one thing I have no cross my luscious beautiful amazing island is the fact that there’s something right there and I can’t tell if that’s just a

Landmass or if it’s a sunken ship now the rule is that I’m not allowed to leave the island so I don’t really think I can go over there maybe when I have some better equipment I’ll check it out I made myself a little sand hole just

For some shelter and hey look at that the bamboo is grown this was a this was a terrible mistake also it looks like there’s a drown spawner thing just off the shore here unfortunately there’s no chest but at least B by bru growing yeah also

Since the DRS were close to I decided I was all right to kill them slow very slow but I got myself some food by the end of it only the finest cuisine on this island of uh rotten flesh yeah and with the night coming it’s the moment

You’ve all been waiting for I have to survive the night with no tools or food now no matter which way you look about it my biggest problem going into this challenge was I had no food the very quick fire way to deal with this is to kill myself some spiders apparently

Fishing seemed like the best way for me to get some food and so I I need myself some string ow it would help if the skeletons weren’t shooting me or the zombies weren’t bugging me but I was able to get myself two string which is fantastic ah

Two string that’s fantastic um yeah I just said that whatever and now we wait for the night when day two came an unforeseen problem creepers don’t despawn and they also don’t know how to die really how many hits did he take at least the bamboo is growing it’s just a

Shame you can’t bone meal the bamboo you could bone meal bamboo did not know that well now it’s time for me to make myself some bamboo planks it’s not working wait they changed it since when when did they change it so in old versions of this snapshot bamboo planks

Were made by just putting four bamboo together in a crafting table recipe to make one bamboo plank they have now changed it so now you need nine bamboo to make a bamboo log which then turns into two bamboo planks however you can only make the new bamboo in a crafting

Table so there’s no way for me to do that plans ruined game over end the video I mean I just can’t get wood can I well no I just have to time travel a little bit by reverting the world back to the original snapshot where the wood

Was made in the original way I was able to make myself some bamboo planks and then make myself a crafting table and after returning back to the latest version I did a little bit of this a little bit of that and would you look at

That a fishing rod I have food I mean it’s only raw fish but no I’ll take it and now it was a game of fishing and bamboo Haring this will be my life for a while I also don’t have any access to Stone at this point so I can’t make a

Furnace but I was wondering if you can make a bamboo campfire and it turns out that’s not something you could do and just before the night came I decided to harvest as much bamboo as I could before returning back to my little hidey-hole this is fun I’m having fun day three and

Oh look at all that bamboo it’s going to take me a solid minute to get it all and with over a stack obtained I can actually do things like make the basic wooden tools and dig a hole and get some Cobble oh this is amazing we got some Co

Too didn’t totally nearly drown by the way we we moveed move on also confirming no you cannot make a campire with bamboo wood disappointing I know so we’ll have to do with the normal boring furnace way to much all the cooked fish that’ll be better for the diet and with the night

Returning I don’t actually have to sit in a hidey hole I can actually cave oh well uh Le I can make myself some stone tools now now digging in the dark is definitely my favorite thing to do at Minecraft except not at all I mean what

Do you think live Haven but I hate digging in the dark my first bit of iron how thrilling and after all this digging after all this scarecase you know what I find a water cave yeah I know it’s kind of incredible on day four that I’m actually fighting back the Mobs with a

Stone sword I know shocking also the bamboo is so much easier to get now that I have a sword but I still do have a food problem and now I don’t now with all the little wood that I have making doors may seem like a strange choice but

If you’re a Minecraft pro like myself of course then you know that getting this coal under water is so much easier when you can breathe I also grabbed some iron de and cooking away we go all in a day’s work and the the fish tastes good God it

Tastes great also I can set myself up some sugarcane I don’t know why I just Did nice after upgrading to iron tools on day five I began to make some more bamboo doors and headed back underground honestly the water cave wasn’t too bad to deal with Lo at the doors made it super easy for me to get all the iron

That I could took me a while to find a nonwater cave and when I did it was a g where there was some skeletons and an Ender that I just looked at Cool Gray none ISS no no issues at all more zombie noises L me to more caves on day six it

Was of course more water Caves at least I was able to find myself some diamonds but Diamond should I say to be fair over the day I was able to find myself a few more diamonds though with no coal I knew my time was mostly up I had seven

Diamonds by the end of the day though and when I got up on day seven it was raining my no coal situation was starting to come a bit of a problem due to not being able to cook some iron so so I headed back to the nearby water

Ravine and grabbed as much as I could on the way back up to the island as well I noticed that there was another sunken ship right next to the island and this Su had carrots which means I could have had carrots and wood from the start are you serious well I quickly headed

Underground to quickly grab some dirt I got myself a stack which will’ll easy do and with these carrots and a bit of bone mealing I actually had food I also made myself a full set of iron armor except the boots now they St they styling and

Now I want to home so I started the basics of making myself a house what all material make this house out of oh I’m I’m doing bamboo who who the guest now the next issue to deal with is I need to get myself a bed and there’s only really

One way to do that and that’s to return back to the spider hunt if only they drop string come on now okay this is ridiculous this is ridiculous um yeah I just said that I was definitely being overrun by the end of the night running

Out of food too so on day eight after doing some minor housework I realized that the only food that I have was this run and flesh but I did have some Bon so that was another easy fix for the food then it was back to the house listen I

Ain’t saying it’s a masterpiece or anything I mean if you’ve seen my other videos but like my dad said the first time he saw me no he’ll do eer got to top it off with a bed the lanterns a bit unnecessary I know for the first time in

This world I was able to sleep in my own home legendary I know we’re only on day nine and I’m going to need to survive 100 days in this world and obviously that’s going to require a lot more food and so I decided to expand the carrot

Farm also grabb myself some more bamboo and though I was planning to go caving because it was thundering I was able to skip the day and I’m not going to complain about that I had another cheeky idea on day 10 I would love to get

Myself a turtle hat so let’s go get some grass and breed some turts didn’t take me long to get two batches of eggs laid and now I just got to wait for them to hatch after that I expanded the bamboo Farm a little bit and I also tried to

Set up something that would make bamboo collection a little bit easier obviously I don’t know if this will help but we shall see and it was back into the cave on day 11 oh there’s a witch oh booger love being on har heart you know the

Feel it feels great being on har heart also I found myself some more water caves there’ll be a great day soon when I no longer have to search water caves kind of getting fit up of them but after most of the day had passed I had finally

Found myself a lava pool and I grab myself 10 pieces of obsidian now usually I grab myself 14 pieces of obsidian 10 for the nether portal and four for the enchant table but there’s no point in me getting the extra four at this point because at this point in time it’s

Basically possible for me to get leather now technically I could get some from potentially fishing but the chances of that are pretty low and so I decided let’s just focus on getting myself into The Nether first after making myself the portal on day 12 I grabbed some snacks

And headed into The Nether and this never sucks I did my best to make my way through you know digging bridging looking but honestly I was pretty unsuccessful this day at least I can get myself some bone blocks and day 13 fancy I know now unfortunately because I am in

The snap shops optify isn’t a thing so it’s really hard to to see what is around in the fog now that could be many things including a fortress so let’s head towards it and once I did get a bit closer would you look at that it is a

Fortress found myself some chest which had some diamonds in nice the blazes were doing some damage which was less nice also I had killed 10 blazes at this point and I only got one Blaze Rod at least I was getting plenty of NE Ward and some more diamonds or else this

Would just be miserable at least on day 14 my Blaze look could turned around and I was starting to get plenty of blaze rods I was also finding all the wither skeletons I could and boy were they doing damage and though it took a while I finally found myself a blaze spawner

After getting myself a few rods I actually noticed that my boots had broken and unfortunately I didn’t have any wood on me so I couldn’t craft anymore which of course is a big big yikes it wasn’t terrible but I was definitely taking a lot of damage though

I was still safely able to get myself 16 blade rods and I knew I was done here it is time to leave it turned to day 15 on the way home I had to deal with some um friends and boy did they hurt also they started kill killing each other as you

Do and then it did take a second I was able to get back to my portal and get home and it’s night so it’s time to sleep I was running a bit low on wood on day 16 and so I set myself up a hopper and tried out my brand new bamboo

Collector it was all right it’s not perfect but let’s be honest it was never going to be then I expanded the carrot Farm before jumping back into the water Ravine cuz I need a bit more coal I did all right I actually getting some I only drowned a little bit which was uh

Positive I guess once day 17 came let me start by saying the caraan was doing doing really really well now these seven diamonds I decided to turn into some diamond boots and I also made myself a second diamond pickaxe and then it was back to the nether weirdly enough I was

Actually looking for brown mushroom back to the drawing board now the chances of a zombie villager spawning on this island is very slim but there is still a chance and if that does happen I want to be in the best possible situation to be able to cure him and that of course

Requires a weakness potion for those who are living under a rock and don’t know you need a brown mushroom to make yourself a fermented spider eye which makes yourself a weakness potion on my travels looking for one I also found myself a warped Forest which was the

Last biome I needed to get the advancement hot tourist destination and look at that there’s some brown mushrooms over there anyway it is time for us to head home so on day 18 I made myself a fended SPID R I was getting some potions Brewing I made some

Weakness even turned them into Splash and then I remembered something that some of you were probably already thought about wait how am I going to get apples oh for God so how was I going to get apples it’s a good question Oak and dark oak trees do drop them but I don’t

Need to explain why that’s not a possibility trading is also a possibility but you know I have no villagers and even if I did I have no emeralds which of course scratches out one Traders which means the only way I can possibly get an apple is to loot a

Structure and get an Apple from there now most structures I won’t be able to access but one I would be able to access is the stronghold this is on the very small list of reasons of why I would be allowed to leave the island to go to the

Stronghold to kill the dragon and So the plan is simple so let’s work towards getting to the stronghold and hope there is a chest in there that actually has an apple first things first though let’s head back underground quickly grab myself some more obsidian and after watching the mobs kill each other again

It was like a Roy Rumble down here no jokes I grabbed myself enough obsidian to make a second nether portal so on day 19 after the obligatory grabbing the carrots and harvesting the bamboo I went back to the nether now I wasn’t interested in killing the dragon just

Yet but if I can get myself about five ender pearls I should be able to to find the stronghold with that it’ just be useful if the enemy decid to actually drop some Ender pears no pressure at all all right there you go piglin go away go

Go away please go away all right Enderman okay that got me to five pills on day 20 and the Sun is setting by the time I got back the usual so on day 21 I had a bit of a thought leaving my Island on a survival island challenge go to the

End to get an apple is probably the weirdest reason I’m ever going to leave this island still going to do it I’d also like to mention that I did set myself an extra rule that whilst I was off off the island I purposely didn’t grab any extras to make myself easier

For example I didn’t get any trees or saplings or extra seeds to help myself I purposely just went to the mainlands just to find the stronghold and on day 22 I believe I found it after entering the stronghold I found myself a chest when well that didn’t take long at all

And would you look at that the Portal’s right around the corner as well there’s no eyes in here which uh H now remember that I grabbed that obsidian what I did was I set myself up a NE portal in the main room of the stronghold and now I’m

Going to dig a path back to my main portal so I have a direct link so it’s going to be much quicker for me to get from one side to the other when I need to it was a lot of digging and placing Cobblestone blocks but by the end of the

Day we got that all done day 23 and I don’t think I need to tell the brainiacs who’s watching this video that you need a golden apple to cure a zombie villager and of course a golden apple requires gold and so I had to head back into the

Cave because I didn’t have any oh hey I found some more diamonds sweet after mining just over 30 gold I headed back up to the surface it was night again and as I tried to sleep well there was mobs I had to fight off an army just to be

Able to sleep for the night and just usual Survival Island things I guess it might have taken 24 days but I also was able to make myself a bow took long enough also I decided to make myself some golden cameras good investment is something I’ve never really done before

And then it was back to the fishing because a couple of useful things I potentially could get from fishing like leather now I asked for leather these leather boosts is not what I was looking for to be honest with you the main reason I was fishing was just because I

Was waiting for the night once the night did comb well there was Ms well unfortunately there was no zombie villagers the skeleton hun definitely an issue though but after fighting throughout the night no zombie villagers spawned I decided to kill another day on day 25 let’s add a second layer to the

House with more bamboo and more glass perfect sure we we’ll say perfect and then moving the loot over to the second story of the house by the time I was done it was night again another night of fighting mobs blowing up a little you know the usual things but yet again

Throughout fighting the entire night no zombie villagers spawned so with d 26 here and some more time to kill I was thinking back about lever again now there is quite a few simple ways to get lever that I didn’t think about earlier with the obvious one is I could just

Simply trade it with some piglins so if I can get myself some gold the piglins have a small chance of giving me lever and so it was back into nether though I only did have four gold I just have to deal with this hoglin perfect he’s out

The way where did you see it the lever that the hoglin dropped now not only did I not see it I didn’t know that hoglins could drop leather which makes me the biggest of 2023 and it’s only January anyway after some trades I got myself some leather and it is time to leave

Where more H hoglands not a problem I can just climb the vines where oh no this is fine everything is fine and though it took 26 days it was now time for me to do some enchants if I had some obsidian or lapis which I don’t but I

Could do that tomorrow and once the night came and oh my God this this guys zie zombie villager it’s happening oh my god let’s cry baby yes let’s go oh he’s a nitwit he’s a godamn nitwit you having a laugh well now what with that failure out of the way I got into

The caves I was looking for some lapis where I found not one not two but three veins of diamonds and it was only five but there we’ll take it also found myself a spawner where I got myself some beetroot and some melon seeds after that I grabbed myself some obsidian took me

Till the next day to actually find myself some lapis lagal I also grabbed myself myself a little bit of extra gold and I also got myself some diamonds too anyway it was time for me to head home so on day 29 I need to get myself some

More dirt for the melons and beetroot so I have to go into M some and there was some lapis right here since when how did I miss that anyway the melons were set up I also planted the beetroots gross I know and I got myself an enchant table

Set up I used the remainder of my diamonds to make myself a new sword and a new helmet now I do need a little bit more Ryan because I was running low on that one we had to think 29 days and I’m low on iron of all things H day 30 came

And I found myself a second spawner got myself a name tag which could be useful you never know and after more iron Mining and more coal mining honestly apart from a creeper jump scare I got a stack of raw iron also got myself a couple of extra diamonds too day 31 came

And I’ll be honest I didn’t do a lot on day 31 I was just cooking some things I also checked the eggs you know the turtle eggs that I’ve been helping to hatch and they haven’t even cracked yet not really sure why and then I went well

AFK yeah on day 32 I decided to head back to the stronghold for a few things the never trip well it wasn’t great but when I did get that I quickly found myself Li the blocks were pretty good however this stronghold I am going to quickly show you that this is the

World’s smallest stronghold there is like three rooms and suddenly there is no more apples for me cuz there is no more chest for me to find there’s no more anything for me to find the stronghold is pathetic and so I was doing a little bit of research on day 33

Apples don’t spawn in the Nether and you also can’t get them from can ships in fact the last way you could get them is to potentially trade them but yeah sadly that’s not a possibility for me in this situation either because I have a godamn nitwit now in theory I could find myself

A second stronghold and do that one but I just feel like that would be kind of pushing the rules a little bit the rules were that I wasn’t allowed to leave the island with very few exceptions and finding a second stronghold feels a bit cheaty to me so sadly I don’t think

There is any way for me to get any extra apples some good news though thanks to the books and the combining I was able to make myself an efficiency 4 diamond pickaxe plus I have a level 30 enchant table set up I don’t have the levels but

We can work on that soon and when I say soon I mean literally the next day because on day 34 I ran back into never to get myself some levels quartz is a very easy fix for lack of levels in this world not really sure exactly when this

Happened but between days 35 and 36 I got myself up to 30 levels and it was by day 37 that I got myself 33 levels which will be enough for two good enchants all right we were Enchanted on day 38 where the pick honestly it’s all right but I

Really would have liked fortune and the sword I mean I’ll take the Looting but it could have been better as well and then I got attacked by a Pillager man what a what a crazy battle that was that was insane well I guess I can now go

Back into the ne to grab myself some ender pearls and get myself some never skull I just call him never skull now I’m not saying soon but eventually I do want to fight the Ender Dragon and I also want to fight the weather and so on

Day 39 I headed back into never to see if I can get myself some more pills and skulls and the plan was simple let’s start by getting myself some wither skulls on day 40 I got myself my first skull and then a couple days later on

Day 42 I got skull number two and then way immediately it took longer than I expected it to it was day 45 when I obtained my third Wither Skull and after that I headed back to the W Forest because I’m going to see if about getting myself a stack of Ender pears by

Day 46 honestly this was a lot quicker the Looting was making things really really simple I got myself 13 Ender pears and I decided that that was easily enough and so I returned back home and of course it was night I mean when it’s always not where I comeb back it’s like

It’s like a trend for me day 37 is time to enchant a bow come on Infinity come on Infinity let’s go all right then let’s redo a diamond pickaxe come on Fortune give me some Fortune oh let’s go and now we can cave we do need to get

All the iron gold and diamonds that we can find so we’re probably going to spend a couple of days down here now at this point finding iron and finding gold was really really easy I was finding a bunch but the diamond however on day 48

Though I plan to C for a while because my pants broke I decided to change my tactics a little bit let’s let’s do a little bit of strip mining now I’m not even joking it took exactly 2 minutes for me to find this diamond vein and

Thanks to the fortune I got myself 17 diamonds this easiest thing I’ve ever done should have done this earlier oh Jesse we we need to cook or whatever on day 49 now that’s that’s that’s the Rick and mo reference right better make myself the rest of the diamond St of as

Well I do have this book which I got from the stronghold so I’m definitely going to put that on one of these bad boys you what I’m just going to do a good enchant as soon as I can get this up to level 30 it is taking an eternity

Though all right then what we got GL protection nope fire protection that’s even worse uh oh boy what do we do here then I don’t really want to do either I guess we’ll just save up some levels and uh come back you don’t sleep for one night

And all the creepers pop out like they own the place all right come on protection four you know what I’ll take it I’ll take that cuz with this bad boy that is Protection free chest plate over Protection free leggings projectile protection 2 boost which not gray and a

Protection One helmet but we can actually start taking hits now without having to die for 2 seconds that sounds nice with all the iron and gold cooked up things were looking good great in fact it was on day 51 where I decided to spice up the island a little bit making

The enchance set up look a little bit more better making it have more than just bookshelves I really feel like added to the island and then I added some paths now there’s probably some people in in the comments asking why I’m using deep SL Cobble and the better

Question to ask is what why you asking it’s my Island and then on day 52 I decided it’s now time for me to take on the dragon so I headed back into never to do this also I want to point out something interesting that happened I

Don’t know if this was a glitch or not but basically you can clearly see that my shield is down but it’s like deflecting stuff as if it was up I don’t know if this was a 1.20 thing or a known thing I don’t know how I did it but uh

Yeah this was just a thing that was happening in the nether anyway into the end I go the fight went mostly well hitting the crystals was something I’m getting really really good at if you ignore the cage ones okay let’s definitely ignore the cage ones and once

They were all gone the dragon was giving me very little issue it was honestly a very well performed dragon fight and after leaving the end the sun hadn’t even set yet so in less than 10 minutes I got to the end and killed the dragon

Which was pretty good on day 53 I made a little Monument towards the end of dragon and it it looks all right I mean it’s nothing special after that I decided to reenchant my boots and helmet that cost me most of my life levels isn’t that fun I also redid my sword hey

This was pretty good this is the best gear I’ve ever had but I’ll take it on a survival island and once day 54 came I made the decision that I’m going to go explore the outer end ridges so into the end I went and it was through the

Gateway to explore the end day 55 came and I’ll be honest it is kind of hard to give daily updates when you’re searching these kind of things I mean everything in the end look exactly the same all I’m really doing is killing some Endermen and pearing around just looking for an n

City but here I am on day 56 doing the exactly the same a little bit of a side note is that these golden crowers are fantastic and I should make them more often when I can and I was still looking at day 57 we was about an hour in at

This point where oh wait there you go there’s one to be honest I’m not really bothered about the elytra it was more the shulkers that I thought was going to be useful and after floating around and murdering shulkers in the coolest way possible I you even got some decent

Stuff in the chest but after heading over to the end ship of course I grabbed the lon in there and it was now time for me to head home can’t go without the dragon head of course I mean cuz I’m never going to leave the dragon head

Also just because I can’t I’m going to cheat the floating advancement I mean it’s just it’s just a usual thing I do nowadays so uh yeah I’m not going to do a running back Montage here we are on day 60 where I got back to the Gateway

Portal and it was through and home we go just you know ignore the falling using the armor that I found on day 61 in the nend cities I decided to combine it with my own armor to improve it a decent amount I was trying to write some notes

About it for this kind of commentary but unfortunately these farting baby zombies kept booking me like all up in my grill you know how it is now my next Tas was pretty simple I need to get myself some iron and a lot of it because I would

Like to make myself a full Beacon so it was back into the caves I go to give you an idea of how much iron I need on day 62 this is roughly how much I need everything in the Sher needs to be at least a stack where there is currently a

Piece of iron and so I have quite a bit of a ways to go little bit of an update on day 63 I got an extra two stacks of iron which was quite slow the progress was quite steady so I really need to pick it up if I possibly can also so RI

My shield didn’t even know was low durability and uh I found a giant cave with plenty of iron and even a couple more diamonds for me so progress very quickly picked up here in fact it was only the next day on day 66 where I got

Myself enough iron and it was time to leave it was thundering when I was up as well so I took a quick nap on day 67 I made myself a mini Auto cooker will hopefully speed up the process a little bit with all the cooking I know it

Doesn’t necessarily look that fancy but you know what let me move it outside so it make it look a little bit better made its own area and now that day 68 is here now it’s just about passing a little bit of time I’ll start by fixing my bow and

Making some more golden carrots I did dig out the area where I’m going to put the beacon in the near future just the basics to pass the time and it was on day 69 where I got bored of waiting around and I decid to go into the never

Because I’m going to go get myself some neite listen we all know how this goes You Dig Down you mine all the rack and then you just find as much neite as you can it took me about 30 minutes on Day 70 for me to get myself my first batch

Of never right which which is definitely not a good sign though I did get a couple more P same day just to fight the lava to get to it I got two more veins basically next to each other on day 71 which is always appreciated and though I

Got nothing on Day 72 I got myself two more quick V veins on day 73 day 74 and I realized there was a little bit of a trend here when I did Findation de Bria there was only batches there was like three veins basically next to each other

In this case I mean see what I mean there’s two more veins right here and both of them are right next to each other and on day 75 I got the last B of H debris that I need which honestly wasn’t too bad it didn’t take me too

Long to get it all well it’s time for me to return home I got back on day 76 and it was now back to the waiting so that’s nice we’re almost done on day 77 so I decided to cook myself a little bit of glass and I also went to go and grab

Myself some obsidian need it all to obviously make a beacon and well you can never be too ahead of the game on day 78 I was just four block sh for me completing the beacon however because of how quick the auto cooker was it didn’t

Take me any time at all for me to get those four blocks and just look at that the beacon is already done let’s fill it in with sand and oh it looks perfect you wouldn’t even know a Beacon’s there if you didn’t dig it up and now I can cook

The ancient debris day 79 I think we can all agree on one thing it’s really satisfying to get yourself full neite armor to think that I started on this island with literally nothing over than one piece of bamboo and almost 80 days later I have now got full neite where

I’ve done all right I’d say I think I’ve done okay speaking of bamboo I should definitely get some more my wood supply is still quite low and I also decided to expand the farm a little bit I’ve been meaning to do it for a while to be

Honest with you I look like I’ve got plenty of dirt spare and though it took all day they are quite farly expanded so that’s going to help in my food supply quite a lot I just got to get all the crops sped on day 80 so I started with

The carrots moved on to the melons and even got myself some beetroots I know it’s gross but by the end of the day all the crops were in place and planted we were good to go now on day 81 I would say that I have a Wither to fight and to

Be safe I’m going to make myself some health potions now I only had tier one because I had no glow stone available it’s fine I’m not going to rinse the ne I should be all right to deal with tier one I mean do you know how many times I

Fight this little Na and on day 82 I went into the caves to fight the Wither now to be 100% honest with you I don’t like fighting Withers in caves I think it makes it a bit easier but I’m not letting him destroy the island there’s

Not much of it as it is and so I found a previously unexplored Bush caves and the fight was on it was mostly easy I didn’t struggle that much with this fight I think the only funny thing to point out is that I killed him with a health

Potion which is something I’ve never done before and i’on didn’t even know you could do it but we are done back home I go the beacon was made and perfect we had made ourselves a full beacon on the survival island day H3 came and well now what I kind of did

Everything I was planning to do on this island and so I decided to fix the island up with a couple of creepy blasts that were happening on the island as well also remember my originally hidey hole from the early night when I just sat in here oh look how far I’ve come I

Can finally fill in this hole with no fear of the night I also remember remember that sunken ship that I saw a very long time ago I feel like enough time has passed for me to be able to go and explore it first chest froze my game

For a little bit not really sure why give it a second and oh hey bir treasure map and the other chest had nothing special also this map for whatever reason it glitched and it just turned into a normal map somehow again I don’t know if this is a 1.20 glitch or whatnot

But yeah this B treasure map is now just a map don’t one date 84 it did give me a bit of a cool idea and now I can make a big map and you know look at the entire Island and everything around it definitely made it too big when I

Expanded it out a little bit so I made four small maps and put them all together the question is am I going to sacrifice the only fall lever I have to make myself some item frame yes yes I am and it’s tiny very tiny but I kind of

Like it on day 85 there is only one more task for me to do so for those who are new to the channel and you made it this far in the video first of all thank you for spending so much time here I really appreciate it and second of all you

Should know that I’m a really big fan of a certain music disc but this music disc can only be found in Bastion so back to the never I go for the last time in the series The small problem is I’m yet to find a Bastion and so I’m going to have

To explore a little bit The Journey on 86 was pretty basic between killing gas and making epic jumps I was Finding absolutely nothing in fact on day 87 it was even worse when the most exciting thing about your day is killing piglin you know you’re not having a good day

And another day of traveling on day 88 it was a fun time and 89 yet was more huh oh my God a Bastion it’s time for me to head in and well there was a little bit of an Army in here Lu I’m way too

Sex for this to be an issue and there’s a chest at the center of this type of Bastion and in the chest it had some piig step woo I got back home on day 91 it was night and on day 92 was there a need to put some soul sand on my boots

Probably not at all but I did it anyway and then I set myself up a little jukebox area got some deep slay paths to it and now now I was technically done so what was I going to do I think I’m just just going to reill the dragon just to

Kill the time at this point it’s just about surviving to day 100 like I say I completed all of my tasks and so back onto the never on day 93 because I’m going to go and get myself some gas tiers obviously to respawn the dragon you need the ender crystals which

Require gas tiers and I got four gas tiers the same day which was pretty good stuff and on Day 94 I had some spare Eyes of Ender for when I originally traveled to the end turned those bad boys into some ender crystal with day 96 that I moved towards the end portal

Honestly I probably could have done this only one day but I was honestly just trying to kill some d and it this fight after respawning the dragon was very similar to the second one the crystals were easy the cages were come on come on other Dragon was literally on zero HP

Come on come on oh come on there you go and on day night7 when I got back now I was really really done had one last little tour of the island just had to look at around of the couple of things that I did also the turtle eggs never

Hatched I don’t know why maybe someone could explain in the comments but when I got to to day 100 I freed my nitwit friend and well I down to some pig St woo it’s good to be back baby so I’m actually recording this only a couple of

Days after the 100 days video comes out but the 100 days video is currently on path to do really really well so I hope this is the sequel that everybody wants I hope people were craving for 200 days on this survival island that being said it’s been about 3 weeks maybe more since

I’ve actually been on this island so let me just have a quick look around so I needed to give myself a bit of a look around want to just remind myself of everything that had happened I tried to make that little home for the ax that I

Picked up at the end of the last 100 days wasn’t going to work because I’m my Frost Walker booster so I decided to move it into a new location so as I said this video is pretty much happening only a couple of days after I uploaded 100

Days and I’m receiving a lot of comments about a few couple of things and I just want to address them but uh I’m not the man who is capable to answer your questions I’m going to pass it over to everybody’s favorite Minecraft expert Dr Haven and take it away doctor it’s good

To be back ladies and gentlemen Dr Haven and here well let’s talk about the first 100 days the series has done incredibly well as Haven has already said however there was four pretty frequently commented things in the first 100 days video so I’d like to quickly address

Them if that’s okay number one the island kind of looks like India yeah I guess it does number two it’s cheating to go back in time so I saw a few people calling me a cheater because I reverted the version of the first day of Minecraft to be able to get myself

Wooden planks basically I turned it back before the new bamboo wood crafting recipe was a thing and my very simple question to the people who think that is is it cuz someone please explain to me what rules I’m exactly breaking my own personal set of rules as was I wasn’t

Allowed to leave the island unless I was going to fight the Ender Dragon for example or that I was going to stay in 1.20 and neither of those rules was broken when I reverted the version back I was still in 1.20 just an earlier version of it and I never left the

Island to do it yes I spawned in the bamboo I’m not going to pretend I didn’t for the people commenting that but the whole point of the video was to survive with one piece of bamboo on an island that is technically unsurvivable if we ignore the mosque blocks yes I’m aware

Of the Moss blocks so yeah can someone please explain to me why they think that’s cheating I’d love to know but I just don’t understand it number three bamboo are crops and turtles are animals okay if we’re going to be technical yes the thumbnail is wrong because there are

Animals on the island Turtles and there is crops on the island in sugarcane this admit was a little bit of an oversight for me but when I was making those comments I was mainly referring to useful animals or useful crops I mean yes sugarcane can be useful but not for

The start of the situation I was mainly talking about crops and animals that could give food so like cows or pigs for animals or carrots or potatoes for crops now obviously yes I guess I did technically get that wrong so I apologize not really much I can say

About this but let’s be honest for a second how are turtles going to help me survive a 100 days in my could some does turtles have a secret thing that I don’t know about I swear to God if they do I’m I’m going to give up so yes there was

Animals and crops on the island just not useful ones for survival and and number four the golden apple all right I can see this one so have you ever heard of tunnel vision basically the idea that you’re focusing on one point so significantly that you ignore everything

Around it yeah I got it bad so in the last video I said that there was no way for me to get apples on this island over than searching a second stronghold which I didn’t want to do I was correct about that even to the people who were

Commenting that I could get apples from AI trees you can’t get apples from aula trees people I looked into it however why did I need that Apple simple I needed a golden apple and can you get golden apples in Minecraft well technically yes you just have to find a

I don’t know a m shaft spawner Bastion broken NE portal just a name a few things all of which I have access to for the record so uh does that still make me the biggest fool of 2023 now that we’re in February but yes yes it does I hope

That answered you guys’ questions from the first video I apologize if I missed anything but let’s move on we’re going to go into NE so we can find ourselves Sebastian to get a golden apple now sadly for me on day one and three I never actually rid down the qus to the

First Bastion I found in the first 100 days and so I had to hunt around the never again looking for a new Bastion lucky for me though on day 104 I actually found myself a Bastion that was arguably even closer than the first one and that is where disaster struck

Could you imagine planning to make a 200 days video and dying on day 104 that would have that have been awful anyway moving on I searched the chest with honestly no luck and I was honestly about to give up on this Bastion until I found the big room that has a couple of

Chests chest one unfortunately had nothing what about chest two chist Pi step and that is a Haven and victory just wish I would have thought about the golden apples 50 days let’s move on going to M myself some quartz and get myself some levels quickly on day 105 I got myself 30

Levels which is brilliant it’s time for me to hand home I decided that I wanted to get rid of the frost Walker on my boots it was kind of annoying fortunately there’s no way to just get rid of frost Walker I have to get rid of

Every enchant on there that was the plan at least until why is there a chicken no no no not complaining so this entire island is a beach biome which means passive Ms unfortunately don’t spawn on this island so how did this chicken show up my only working theory is that a

Chicken born as part of a baby zombie chicken Duo the zombie would have died in the sunlight however the chicken survived so I have my first Chicken on the island the sad thing is though if I am right with my theory which I can’t see any other way a chicken would have

Spawned baby zombie chickens don’t lay eggs unfortunately so I can’t really reproduce the chickens with just one chicken I’m going to have to wait for a second chicken to spawn for the time being I’m going to put this chicken in a hole anyway let’s redo my boots which

Honestly they weren’t terrible and with this name tag I knew there was only one name to give to this chicken i dub the king Pedro the king of the chi chickens I don’t know it was funny in my head I was following more of you guys advice on

Day 106 a very long time ago I found this sunken ship where I grabbed most things from it however I left the Moss block because I originally thought it was kind of useless however as many of you have involved me if I bone me the Moss then I can actually get myself some

Wood some trees so anyway I began bone mealing the M hoping to get some aulia saplings you get grass no way I will say though it is kind of annoying to know how um well how smart you guys are at times how dumb I can be like seriously I

Could have had Caesars entire time so anyway I grabbed myself some dirt and I started bone mealing like crazy I got myself a giant wheat farm setup and it’s another Farm you know it looks good looks great and then on day 107 after reading even more comments I decided to

Follow some more advice a couple of people mentioned that the reason the turtle eggs weren’t hatching was because there wasn’t enough space around them and so I expanded the Cobblestone walls around the eggs hoping that that would do something anything thing hopefully this will help but I mean they’ve been

Laying around for like 20 days I’m not that hopeful and then I grabbed the quartz that I had M because I actually had a use for it for once I really don’t like this hole in the wall for the axelo so I decided I’m going to make myself a

Nice little small aquarium for the guy on day one away I did have to grab some CA pickles and some sea grass to add to the aquarium but there you go again it’s not much which is a lot of things I keep saying on this island honestly I did

Still like it and then onto another build that I wanted to do I was getting really fed up with these storage chest looking like well this is just a mess in here here so I’m planning to build myself a bit of a stor I do need some

Wood though now building is not a skill I’m very good at I’ll be the first person to admit it and so I spent the rest of the day actually on YouTube I was looking for some tutorials to build a simple basic story CH and I think I

Found one by the end of the day and so on day 109 I started using some bamboo to create some walls it was a pretty tall building but it’s going to need to be for the ideas that I had and then I began digging out the floors I even

Began working on the roof which was not something I was looking forward to but I had the roof completed by day 110 and after that I put some lanterns in not a Haven on build if you don’t have lanterns in I also realized I made a bit

Of a mistake on the floor so I started working on that a bit just to fix it quickly and then moving on to day 111 I started getting the chest in I also added this centerpiece in which you know had some water in which I thought looked

Pretty cool and now it’s time for the grand reveal so full disclosure really quickly I actually didn’t fully follow the tutorial the tutorial had more work on the roof but I wasn’t too bothered about that and hly the materials used wasn’t bamboo I think it was Spruce Wood

But I’m going to be 100% honest with you I actually really like this storage shot now I know that’s probably just me being delusional that it’s a semide decent build but you know let me let me know what you think of these builds cuz there’s a couple coming up and I I

Honestly kind of like the builds that happen on day 112 I’m going to give everybody a little bit of the history lesson now before a time of item frames was invented when everyone had the storage system they have item frames and they put an item in the item frame and

That’s how you designate what chest had what well we didn’t have them back in the day and you know we used Signs Now in comparison of course it looks terrible but you know that’s just what we did now it’s time to move all of the stuff over where oh my God there’s a

Wandering Trader and here saplings Birch or alacia oh boy boy I mean this is uh this is going to take me a minute well I guess I’ll pick the lesser of two evils and after moving everything I had to the outside chest of the storage H is now

Time to start organizing everything that I had I wish there was anything I could say to make day 113 more interesting but over then I sorted all my chest I honestly didn’t do that much at least by the time I was done my Island was looking a lot cleaner and for the first

Time in 113 days I popped down a little bit of a dirt area I popped down a sapling and would you look at that a tree who who the funk it no never never me and as the sun sets on this beautiful day what a great day to be on the

Survival island just amazing it began thundering on day 114 and as I was looking around I heard a noise a familiar noise oh my God a second Z zombie villagers are spawned and I’ve checked this guy’s not a nitwit I quickly grabbed the golden apple I got

From the Bastion and the potions I had left over for the first 100 days and I was beginning the curing process it’s happening Lads I can’t believe it’s happening anyway let’s leave for now oh right the zombie villager stoping you know let’s just sleep in the storage show it’s always been a comfortable

Place to go day 115 and there’s another one there there’s another one I don’t believe oh well booger no so now once the zombie villager has actually been cured I actually will have trade so I need to decide what trade I want to turn him into to get the max maimum amount of

Emeralds now my usual go-to in this situation is actually Fletchers because 32 sticks for a single Emerald is the easiest trade in the world unfortunately despite the bamboo and the Alasia trees I don’t actually have that much wood or at least not enough to sacrifice to be a

Large amount of emerald but you know what I do have a lot of farm lots of carrots weed beetroots all of it so I’m going to make myself a farmer villager plus there is the chance that farmer villagers would need apples I don’t actually need apples anymore it’s just

Nice to have them just to brag that I actually have apples so anyway I made myself a composter and I got myself a new friend Harrison beetroots you say let me just that’s a nice trait anyway now both melons and pumpkins were an options and I have melons just not any pumpkins and

So I started grabbing as many melons as I could I was so close to maxing him out already no more crops to trade I decided that I know I just met the guy I know you probably shouldn’t do this kind of thing from strangers but I’m just going

To buy this suspicious St I’m sure this one go wrong and on day 116 actually getting a Max farmer I got no apple trays which is just you know that’s of course I didn’t well I can’t just let the villagers live inside my home I need

To make myself a villager Hut and though most of you are probably going to hate me I just didn’t want to use bamboo anymore I’m going to make it out of AAA wood it does require well alacia wood and a lot of it so I’m going to have to

Wait for these guys to grow I pretty much just decided what spot I was going to put the new hood in it was going to be a big playy I’ll tell you that much I also decided to finally test out the suspicious D so I took myself a little

Bit of damage Ste one gave me jump boost which honestly could be useful in certain situations while Stu gave me poison which is you know that’s probably a little less useful to be honest with you on day 117 I didn’t actually look up a tutorial this time I just well went

For it I was hoping that my building skills would actually be able to you know deal with it as you can see I’m using red stained glass for the pains and I definitely should have gotten all the wood before I started but what can you do I was trying that you’re going to

Give me a trap I was trying I was adding like depth with the logs I was even putting trap doors I was really trying here I never thought I’d be using beetroots but uh here we are with red dye H the glass went in now it was onto

The roof I had this idea to mix like logs and slabs on the roof though I was running out of logs and I’m going to be honest with you I actually kind of liked it so I quickly grabbed myself the rest of the wood and finish it off I must say

If you’ve watched my builds for a while you got to admit I’ve definitely made worse than this this all right and so on day 119 just to finish off this B oh lanterns who have seen that one coming the floor was dug out and then replaced

And then I got the vill VES in there good amount of progress being made so far and now this is where things are going to get a little bit complicated so to breath Villages you need two things the first one is a food sauce like carrots bread or potatoes of which I

Have plenty of and the second one is Beds which requires wool which I have very little of so my only really access to get myself wool is some string I did have 28 By Day 119 but that’s honestly not a lot you know what would help them

If Shepherds traded wool they they do but they only buy it they don’t sell it what kind of Shepherd doesn’t sell wo well I was at least able to get two beds in and it was back to the most oldfashioned way of getting string 119 days in and I am spending the night

Hunting spiders just like night one everything sort of comes around in a full circle in the end of the day I mean to to be fair I got 37 string which was all right and then on day 120 I got a whole uh three beds I’m sure and now I

Needed a bit of a food sauce I wonder if this is going to be enough yes yes I do think it’s going to be enough this sir it’s a lot of carrots breed my babies breed and after 120 days I have a child all right let’s do some more trades M

And on day 121 I came up with another idea with these farmer villagers right here I’m going to try and do something that I’ve never done before and that is to make a semi-automatic crop Farm I picked up all the crops and I also picked up all the dirt and I began

Designing a little PL to make myself an automatic farm now the design I’m doing on day 12 too is kind of hard to explain but basically all you need to know is that I’m hoping all the water will push all the crops into a bottom opper system for immediately collect however it does

Require some more blocks so I am going to need to get myself some Cobblestone after getting the cobblestone on day 1 2 3 I got the walls in the next on the list was dispensers which it requires string of course it does just going to wait out until the night but hang out

With my Village of friends don’t have anyone else on this island also I want to point out whilst I was searching up the easy ways to get string I was thinking maybe Villages would trade string and again they do in fact there’s two different kinds of villages that

Trade string however both of them buy string why do no one sell it anyway throughout the night I was killing plenty of spiders but unfortunately I only got 25 string this time and I realized that this was going to take forever if I didn’t find a quicker way

To do it so was an easy and good way for myself to get some string honestly there’s not that many options the most simple answer is to obviously kill some spiders it is the easiest way to do it but it’s arguably the slowest way to do

It as well there are a couple of harder quicker ways to do it so let’s look into those the first option is to find myself a spawner primarily a spider spawner so i’ have an infinite supply of spiders to kill the second way would be able to

Find myself a m shaft which admittedly would have some limited string but still have a lot sadly 124 days into this world I am yet to find either but in the grand scheme of things I think it would be worth the risk if I could find myself

So I grabbed myself some extra wood and headed into the caves and though I found myself plenty of mobs just a couple no Bigg I am yet to find myself a my job oh hey a diamond now on day 125 if I actually needed diamonds this would be a

Great day I was actually fighting myself quite a few veins and thanks to the fortune I was collecting diamonds quite nicely unfortunately I am full never right so he’s kind of a waste of time and well it’s not a m shaft which I’m looking for I still searching on day 126

I was searching L caves which was quite nice and oh hey a m shaft nice didn’t take long at all honestly this was a game changer I found so much string in here was amazing now it did take me a little while to find this m shaft and I

Had to dig quite far away to find it as well so unfortunately I’m going to only really stay here once and it’s going to be kind of difficult to un back basically what I’m trying to say is I need to get as much string whilst I’m

Here so I don’t have to make the very long effort of getting my way back anyway after getting myself plenty of string and some diamonds of course I found myself a spawner it was zombie unfortunately I did find myself a cave spider spawner though which I don’t

Really want to fight cave spiders but there’s normally quite a lot of string around the spawner so I’ll definitely take that and by the end of day one 2 7 I believed I searched every last Corridor in this m shaft and got myself nearly four stacks of string easily

Enough anyway it is time for me to head home I got back on day 129 and realized a mistake a dispenser requires Redstone and I have never picked up any Redstone guess I could do that tomorrow ladies and gentlemen today is a significant day the time stamp this video for you guys

Today is January 24th 2023 and the reason that is significant is because 2 hours ago Minecraft has just released its latest 1.20 snapshot now they haven’t made too many changes but they have made one significant thing to this bad boy the smiing tape what I could do

Is I could pop it down here and would you look at that things look different you can now add trims to your armor which I’m sure I’m showing on screen now to do that I need to find a template and templates are not that easy to come by

And in this world I’m kind of limited on what I can get so I was going to make this farm and make it all cool but I’m really excited to get a template between the ones that are available and honestly there’s not that many I believe the

Spire one is maybe the coolest if not the snout but basically we’re going to put our plans on pause and we’re going to go again some trim neite that sounds awesome so it was into The Nether I now need to find myself a new new Bastion that hasn’t been loaded before and hope

That there is a trimming inside of it it would have been much easier if I didn’t charge into the Bastion as soon as I got on this island but then what can you do now I’m sorry to say but I did actually lose track of time here I don’t actually

Know exactly when this happened so just bear with me uh basically found myself a Bastion which was fantastic and I did have to deal with some high damage brutes and stuff but uh I was able to survive that quite nicely now the chance of getting a trimming is pretty low 4.8%

Which is not massive that’s basically equivalent of one in every 20 chests so hopefully this won’t take too oh in the first chest sweet don’t mind if I didly do and it was back home by day 135 I knew because I pressed F3 as soon as I

Got back and was actually able to track my days day 136 is duck Haven again so are pretty cool right we all excited for the update now but for the people who don’t know how trimmings work let me explain you see the template that I found inside the Bastion is a one use

Kind of thing so basically I can only apply one trimming to one piece of Armor after that the trimming completely disappears there is some good news though you can duplicate the trimming it unfortunately is quite expensive though costing seven diamonds so in theory for a full set AKA 4 trimmings you would

Need to give yourself 21 diamonds to duplicate it three times the good thing I got 30 when I went into the M shafts earlier and so I was easily able to make myself four trimmings now to decide what to put as my trimming I know the feature

That the trimming has is that you can apply over ORS so on my neite I could apply all the materials that you can see on screen and I was sort of testing as you can see you have a little bit of a preview here to test what kind of

Trimmings that you have I basically came down to do I want to put diamonds on it or do I want to put emeralds on it but I decided that diamonds was the best way to go I just thought it looked really cool and honestly I have no regrets I

Think diamonds came looking out fun fantastic oh yeah also the Moss I read the comments even the mean ones I can now put down one of these saplings and grow myself in a Zila tree I’m not going to lie I was trying to get apples cuz

People told me I can get apples from them again you can’t on day 137 I went back to the auto farm and headed back underground to get myself some Redstone I did the maths I only need 48 dispensers with no biggy looking for me

I had all the stew of FR and just like that the dispensers were placed the next thing I need on day 138 is 48 buckets so uh rest in peace my iron res I’m definitely going to need some more later I was actually a little bit short so

Thank you so much for H guyan Golems RP my friend you shall be missed now getting the buckets in was really really easy for me to do getting these dispensers to work definitely took a minute so uh give me a second here all right this took longer than I expected

To and I don’t really expect to include many of the uh the creation or the work that I need to put into this let me show you how this works now basically crops are going to be everywhere that you see on the dirt and then for example in this

Situation obviously all the water’s turned on I can easily turn it off uh like that but for example if I have myself some Redstone down here well let’s just pretend that these are carrots I turn this bad boy on it should push the Redstone now there is a chance

It may just shoot off like here but more than likely it will drop into this Hopper system that Hopper system will lead right into this dispenser which has automatic observers and The Observers will shoot out into this water system where I assume the water will be able to

Push that forward and that will lead all the way to right over here where this Hopper system will feed into this chest right here this took so much longer than I thought it was going to uh and we’re still not done now I’ve got to figure

Out how to feed the Redstone and stuff which is not something I’m good at you know I feel like I’m making good progress this should be good in the next day or two uh also I’m very grateful I don’t have to stand near here cuz this ticking side would get annoying fast and

Another problem has just arose and I feel like I may just give up on this project the Redstone to the dispensers there is no way for me to get the redstones to the dispensers the only way for me to fix this is to raise every Rel layer up by one and that sounds

Miserable but I don’t really see a choice so let’s just let’s just get this done and so I basically had to start again ripping up a bunch of the dirt I also decided to do the Redstone paths before I put the dirt back in might save some

Time long run so much longer than I thought later day 147 what day did I start this I want to see like day 135 oh dear okay come on here we go uh okay uh well something’s gone wrong as you could probably tell all right then

Moment of truth let’s see if we can get this bad boy to work uh I mean it’s sort of working left is good right is good you know what it’s not ideal there’s definitely some mistakes happening here but it’s working it’s working right in back we can now actually go and uh plant

Some crops only fudos how many days later and finally I was done only about 10 days after I started anyway let’s get the crops down also had to make another little tweak with some signs cuz unfortunately I made a mistake but it was finally finally done ah so much

Effort Okay I lied but on day 148 now now I’m done let the last torch I swear I’m going to grab myself some water Pockets just to see if I can water the crops just to make them grow a little bit quicker and with the spare string I

Had I was able to make myself some more beds I also made myself a Lecter and after giving the villagers some food it’s pretty simple what I want I want to give myself mending my armor was pretty damage so I definitely need mending and then it was just passing the time

Waiting for the villagers to grow up so I did the usual stuff like bamboo harvesting I mean some things never change on day one for died I pretty much just went AFK the entire day I’m not going to lie like I said my armor was pretty close to breaking and I didn’t

Really want to risk you know losing the armor because now it would take so much work for me to get any neite armor I’m not about to risk it I mean two babies pops out before I even noticed but uh you know making good progress day one5

When I noticed that the nitwit had decided to hang out with King Pedro as you do and now I need to make myself a new diamond pickaxe did forget I already had two but you know let’s move on I had two enchants available and I was hoping

To get myself some Sil touch cuz it’s the one enchant that I didn’t have I unfortunately failed both times and it looks like the crops have grown quite a bit in the past couple of days so let’s test out this bad boy it honestly wasn’t

Bad I did have to do a few more touches to make it perfect but honestly for what it was designed to do it works pretty well and then after replanting I got myself a good amount of crops this was a worthwhile investment in the long run

And it was on day 51 where well the villagers are now grown up so it’s now for me to spend the next couple of days trying to get mending now I’m hoping it wouldn’t take too oh okay that was quick now let’s grab some melons and then we

Traded them and look at that the turtle X was finally beginning to crack don’t know why don’t know how but hey someone did mention in the comment that you need water near them so they could like pathy to them not sure how correct that is but

That seemed to make a difference if not that it was the expanding of the couple walls and after doing plenty of Trades I got myself four Ming books and just like that I had applied mening to all of my armor and it was only the next day on

Day2 I got the final mening book needed to apply to my pickaxe I just need to repair it all so it was back into the ne to get myself WS mining get myself full durability and everything and it was only the next day on day 153 where I got

Everything maxed out of course mining is so easy you know on day 154 when I returned them I popped down some more lect and I also popped down some more beds I also decided to put down some Fletching tables as well I wanted all the emerald for a future project and

That does require a lot of sticks so let me just turn all this bamboo into sticks and let’s cut down these arcasia trees as well day 55 and I got myself a paper trade meaning for the first time since about day five or something I actually

Had a use for the sugarcane farm that I set up it’s going to be useful for for five emeralds it’s not a lot and sadly the Farms hadn’t grown enough for me to you know trigger that water again so so uh well let’s leave it for the time

Being and then it came a little bit more of a waiting game whilst I was waiting for these babies to grow up I did make the executive decision on day 156 to actually remove some of the composters because I didn’t need as many farmer village anymore and I need to get myself

Some more Fletchling like the Pokémon and the emerald return was just wonderful let me just say that I was also back to chopping the melons that was just the easy thing to do and I also came up with the idea is why don’t I go ahead and get some clerics in I have

Plenty of rotten flesh to trade so let me get myself a cleric rotten flesh is used ful but it was on day7 where I came to the realization that clerics are probably going to be the most broken of them all because clerics trade glass bottles and they give you emeralds for

Them and since I’m on an island that’s oh I don’t know full of sand that just seemed like free money and so I grabbed all the sand I could and made a little bit of a tweak to the auto cooker replacing the blast furnaces with normal furnaces because sadly blast furnaces

Don’t cook sand and we were on our way to getting all the glass bottles possible also most of the crops was grown so I finally decided to flip the switch again I think doing this for a second time in the long run this does make sense to do but I feel like

Shortterm I probably could have got more R rolls but you know I guess it’s always better to do stuff in the long run in 100 day series I’m also really glad that I did make it if I ever make it again I know a couple of tweaks that I can make

To probably improve it but uh I mean that might be for a future video on day 15a I admit it was pretty slow going but I was very slowly building up my emeralds I even got myself some more glass bottles now there’s probably some of you thinking why do I want so many

Emeralds like what could I possibly be planning and the answer is really simple I feel like the ultimate success from this 100 days if I was able to make myself a second full Beacon except this time making it out of emeralds it would just feel like a great achievement

Considering I had no emeralds at the start of the 100 days and so I’m going to grind a little bit with the trades just to give you an idea I need to get myself 1,476 emeralds to make myself a full beacer for those who don’t know that’s

Just over 23 stacks of emeralds so I have quite a bit of ways away to go to give you an idea on day9 I only had three stacks of emeralds so uh yeah I’m definitely going to need to get myself some more I also had the idea of seen

About getting silk touch on my axe cuz it would actually help with the melon cutting but sadly I got Fortune free instead now someone in the comments will probably tell me this but the fortune free felt like I was getting more melons when I was chopping it again someone is

Welcome to correct me if I’m wrong but I you know feel like I was getting more day 160 and that is a lot of emeralds it really was a rotation of exactly what I was trading day by day today was a stick day so I traded many sticks and to be

Honest with you that’s kind of what I did for the next 10 days I’m not going to lie listen I’m sure everybody would love to watch me trade for 10 days but I feel like I’m just going to skip a little ahead cuz if not I’ll be

Repeating myself over and over again so let’s do a little bit of a Time Walk day 169 and oh boy have I been moving let me uh let me show you right in here look at all these emeralds now if I’ve done the maths correctly that should be enough

For a full Emerald Beacon well I think I’ve done trading forever in Minecraft cuz that was a good 4 hours of my life and probably wasn’t that long okay the next job is I need to go and get myself some Withers school so back to the never

I go so it was back to the never going to go ahead and get myself some skulls now the one thing that I will mention is that this time I only had looting two while the first time I did it I had looting free so I don’t know if this

Will take a little bit longer but it is worth me mentioning it was by day 171 that I received my first skull so things were going in an okay pace and honestly it only got better because on day 172 I got myself my second skull this really

Was going to be quick and that is when I jinxed it because here we are on day 176 and I still didn’t have the skull but luckily this day I was able to get it it was still a good 2 hours past and that was disappointing to say the least by

The time I got home on day 177 I had one simple fought I’m not going to need bones anytime soon that’s for sure anyway there is no time like the present grabbed myself a potion just to be on the safe side and I went to the underground yet again now the last time

I F the Wither I’m pretty sure I actually had worse gear than this so I really was wasn’t that worried I did Flex little by killing him with a health potion for the second time but honestly just like the first time this really wasn’t too much of a hassle I was easily

Able to kill him and it was on day 178 where I knew the perfect spot to put this Emerald Beacon I was going to put it underneath the Villager H unfortunately for me the Villager Hut is an even number not an odd number so unfortunately I can’t put it in the

Exact spot I wanted to but it doesn’t matter I did have one little idea though because I traded so many emeralds I feel like it’d be really cool if I could turn the emerald Beacon Light into a green light but of course that means I’m going

To leave myself some green dye lucky for me this time there is actually a trade to get green dye it’s a wondering trade great and of course you can sell green dye to Shepherds but you can’t buy it as if it would be that simple but I’m

Fairly confident that if I combine blue and yellow dye it should make green dye so you know that shouldn’t be an issue right right blue dye wasn’t an issue of course I have plenty of lapis lag goles but unfortunately I don’t have any yellow Dy and uh well how was I going to

Get yellow D and I was thinking on day 179 now to my knowledge and there’s prob probably someone who’s going to correct me the only way for me to get yellow dye is from obviously yellow flowers which the most simple way that I could do it

Is well there is that tiny little grass Island over there that I purposely avoided because I feel like the challenge would make it super super easy if I was able to just go over there straight away but if I go over there just to get a yellow flow and don’t use

Any of the dirt or the seeds or anything I mean I already have wheat seeds I do feel like it’d be that problematic so I came up with a very simple solution if I could just connect the two islands then Tech techically it would be one Island

So I decided if I make myself a bridge to the new island I can go ahead and use the Grass Island and uh yeah I feel like that’s an all right rule so I got to work on a new bridge on day 180 the design was pretty simple bamboo pillars

With trap doors on the floor bamboo railings as well it did cost me all of my iron to put these lanterns in but I mean it’s just kind of what I do though immedately the lanterns made night touch I really feel like the lanterns added to the build and then on day

181 I pretty much just bone meal got myself the yell yellow flower and nothing else because like I said I’m only there for the yellow flower anyway let’s put the blue dye and the yellow dye together and okay I know what people are going to say I know people already

Know this but this is not something you can do I don’t know why I thought it is something you could do yes I am the stupidest Minecrafter you will ever see I do stuff like this and I’m like maybe I deserve the bullying you know maybe maybe people are right well even though

I couldn’t think of a simple way to get green dye I’m still going to change the color so here we are making the Villager H yellow one and the blue one from the main one and uh you know it’s fine oh my God there’s a kitty here oh my God a

Friend I mean it ain’t no wolf it ain’t no park but U I love you all the same I promise speaking of doing smart things on day 182 as you can see there is a blank screen that is because I didn’t record the first half of the day

Basically what had happened I was looking around and realized that the turtles had not only hatched but they had actually grown up as well and dropped some scoots now that’s fantastic fortunately I don’t have the footage of it but here we have the footage of me recording making myself the helmet

Nevertheless we move on doing a level 30 enchantment it is technically less armor than the neite helmet but uh look how dumb I look I can’t even see with this thing that’s hilarious now another little fun fact for you that most of you probably know you can actually trim

Turtle helmet and so I’m going to go ahead and do that now I don’t want to get myself a Bastion trim because I already did that for the netherite armor so I decided let’s go back to the end and see if I can find myself an end one

And so it was back into the end I go now there is a little bit of a problem in this case is that I searched a lot of the nearby end when I was searching for the first ship in the first 100 days which means I do actually have to run

Quite far around because no triming will have spawned in those first nend cities it did take me a while but it was day 186 where I found myself a tiny n city which had honestly not that much now just like the last trimming the first end trimming only had a 4.8% chance of

It spawning so unsurprisingly no trimming was found in this one however about 200 blocks away though as a bigger n city had plenty more for me to search I day 187 hour was getting pretty confident searching this n city I did have to go through Sher hell to finally

Get there but it didn’t take me too long to search chest and finally get myself the trimming which was absolutely fantastic and by the time of day 190 I returned home as I actually duplicate the trimming I actually need myself a purple block and I didn’t grab any from

The nend city lucky for me though I have one spare in my end chest I am one lucky son of a gun at times I’d say you that and so I decided to duplicate it in case I wanted to get myself an end triming more in the future and though I can’t

See I had given myself a trimmed Turtle hat which is just fantastic also which is kind of funny the turtle hat gives you 10 seconds of water breathing and I also had respiration free on the helmet which basically just turns me to Aquaman when I have this helmet on anyway I

Finished the day by just clearing out all the stuff in my inventory and putting the hook I I love this hook man it’s so good game 191 came and I was actually low on food which was a bit of a surprise was a very quick sword though

Thank God for the auto Farm made myself some golden crets and that was it then it was pretty much back to repl planting the crops I also for no of a reason I wanted to make it look a little nicer I decided to make the mine entrance look a

Bit fancier it’s nothing fantastic but I can think you can appreciate the upgrade and uh before people ask yes of course I put lanterns on it and then it was just more quality of life stuff on day one 92 and I was just doing my best to make the

Island a little bit prettier adding more paths to the new stuff I had built I feel like it really made it come together even if it is deep slate and then I spent the rest of the day AFK that was feeding my dog there there is no joke here that that’s

My D and on day 1 193 well I had one last little thing I wanted to do and that was to redo the map that I made in the first 100 days I didn’t actually have any plans to build anything new so this seemed like the perfect time to do

It I am unfortunately out of eyeing though so I’m sorry I Am Golem I just need to wait don’t kill me I’m killing you and four Maps later I have an idea let’s make some hanging signs honestly think it looks pretty good I remade the

Board on the over side side so now I just need some leather for some item frames and I’m good to go hey guys on day 194 I just want to give you a bit of an inside tape did you guys know that hoglins dropped leather did you are you

Guys aware I mean you made me painfully aware but are you guys aware cuz I guys hogl Dro leather anyway I got four by the day and it was on day 195 where I got myself the four item frame the maps were in and you could definitely see the

Differences between the first 100 days and the second 100 days also I was looking at the corners and I was fing do I want to fill out maps to like make it look good you know so they not like the corners are all cut off but uh I decided

That it’s probably better this way just to show that I’ve never really left the island over than the stronghold I I never went to those Corners like in the overw world I did travel which I feel like is a good ad to the world the last

Things for me to do was firstly King Pedro our King needed a home so I brought him inside my house I guess we can share if anything and the nitwit that was there as well I mean fine I guess I could return him home to his

Village of friends and then it was on to a nap well ladies and gentlemen in is day 196 and uh I’ve pretty much done everything that I’ve wanted to do on this island so how about we do a nice little last minute Island Tour uh first things first king Pedro decided to come

Upstairs of course he has we now have three kitties even all of them exactly the same uh I don’t have names for them so maybe get some names for you guys the the never ey helmet maybe I should just uh probably not the smartest thing I’ll

Ever do but not like I need the armor but yeah my full neite armor looks pretty good you know I haven’t touched the house in this 100 days but you know what I kind of still like it feel like maybe I could make the top side of it

Look better like if I had these bamboos and raise them all the top but for the build that’s kept me alive I’m I’m a fan of it obviously we have the 100 days map over here this is pretty much everything that I did and I had the house the auto

Cooker the oh that was the enchant setup there’s the bamboo and there’s the Farms if we go over to this one well there’s the house you’ve got um quite a lot more as you can see obviously the Villager Hood you’ve got the Axel home and the storage Hood the there’s the alacia

Trees there’s the Cobblestone thing that I’ve added to the mine obviously there’s the auto farmer thing which I’m still kind of impressed with that you know that works so well there’s the bridge to the Grass Island which I’d like to very clarify before you start commenting it I

Did not take anything over than the yellow flower don’t comment it I don’t want to see it obviously the Villager H with yellow instead of green which is very annoying but we’ll move on I honestly like the Villager H build it’s really really basic but one thing I’ve

Always struggled with is roofs and I feel like this roof has really come together I mean again I’m not a pro Builder so I’m not going to like brag about how great it is but for what it is I like it it’s another very simple bridge that takes me over to the Grass

Island I feel like maybe if I carry on this series I could do something with this Grass Island I don’t know what it would be you know this Grass Island is free terain now that I’m here and technically speaking I’ve not left the island cuz they’re now attached and the

Big farm really works well it actually works better than I I forgot to fix this H it actually works better than I you know originally thought it was going to it works fantastic and the stuff in there comes through really quickly and I’m not going to trigger it again

Because well I’m not going to go pick it all up the entrance to the cave is pretty much just it’s just a staircase down there’s nothing really special about it but it’s just um you know it makes the island look nicer with all the paths and everything obviously you got

The bamboo setup which I haven’t touched that in 10 days cuz I’ve not needed to here’s our Axel he has been stuck in this quarter for who knows how long but uh well at least he’s got his own home the storage Hut which I think is

Probably the best build on the server I still have like a bunch of chests that for space and stuff which I probably could fill the chest and obviously the Alasia trees that I got from the wandering Trader and the bigstep dance area but um 196 days in I have to remember of course

The beacons as well and I really feel like I’ve done quite a lot here I really feel like I’ve done done all right all things considered the reason I’m having sort of a little tour around my Island even though we’ve got four days left obviously like I said I’ve got not much

To do is because I don’t really get long running Series in my 100 Days videos I’ve made it to 200 days only a handful of of times that I made it to 300 days from the top of my memory twice which is in the Sky Block World when I was still

Like getting my feet and learning how to edit and in um trios the series that did really really well as I am finishing recording this video is currently on 270k the 100 days so I’m hoping it’s still growing by the time I get this up

But if you guys want me to do 300 days uh like the video get it to like between 3 and 5K if if there is Express shown I would love to carry on this world cuz I feel like there’s still quite I could do to it I feel like I’ve done all right

All things considered and to be fair if this is the last time I stand on this island I feel like I’ve done quite a bit um I’ve worked to it I feel like you know what started off as a Sandy Dune with nothing on it and you know me and

One piece of bamboo have made all of this and you can argue whether I should have had the bamboo in the first place or if I should have just used the sunken ship and the Moss which I’m aware that I could do that now but one piece of

Bamboo has made all of this possible I feel like that’s a pretty big accomplishment but yeah I just want to let you know that I I appreciate every single one of you for watching this series it’s been an honor to make it and it’s been an honor to start 2023 on such

A such a high such a high so obviously I will feel the obligation of getting to day 200 and then we’ll do a little bit of a dance you know what it is day 200 and there’s only one thing for me to do that’s a big step W so we began on Day

2011 with just like the first 10200 days I decided to do a bit of live commentary whilst I take a quick look around on the island but as you can see by the clip in my editor there is no audio meaning that I must have accidentally muted my mic

Whilst I did this clip whatever I was talking about it did look super important as you could probably tell but whatever it is you don’t know neither will I but I do know how it ended with a little bit of a catch up with Dr Haven

Back at it again with the Y fans Dr Haven is back ladies and gentlemen so let’s talk 1.20 has been coming out thick and fast and the last update when I played on 200 days was the trimming update they made it so every kind of armor except leather you can add a cool

Trim to to make the armor look better since then a lot has changed 1.20 which now includes you can now get trimmings on lever armor that’s not really important to this video however there is three new additions to 1 20 that is worth talking about the first edition is

The new mob the sniffer apparently you can only get the sniffer fryer eggs which you can find in suspicious ST which is also a new feature so where do you get suspicious St simple you can find them in desert temples and you can also find them in desert Wells which are

Oh right I’m stuck in an island so never mind about that one and the other addition that they added was the cherry blossom tree but again right the the island that I’m on it’s just hoping that I wondering tra can trade them for me so yeah unfortunately the 1 20 updates

There’s nothing I can really do to add to the experience but that doesn’t mean we still can’t have a little bit of fun it was day 202 that I decided that I want to set myself up a mob spawner to be 100% honest I decided to hold off

Against this because I didn’t know if it would be very successful so I decided to set up a nice little simple Cobble one I did get a little bit distracted admittedly I was looking around the island again reminding myself what was going on some good stuff so far I also

Did a tiny little bit of clean up you know moving some chests the gunk to the storage hold name simple stuff really it was day 203 when I got back to it I did run out a couple so I decided to set up a little dig area to dig some out did

All right I’d say and then I began the construction pretty much it was that the entire day by the end of the day I got myself the four water sources in so progress was definitely being made and much more progress on day 204 I had now

Put the floor and the walls in and yet again I am out of Cobble at least I can use the slabs to the roof and I’m out of slabs cool well back to the Cobble ground and let I go on day 205 and listen if you watch any of my Sky Block

Videos you know that I know I know how to do this say that for times fast so after to get the final spots in in the shoot I was done yeah I was just really hoping that I was able to get this to work day 206 and Dr Haven is back so

What is the ultimate goal for this 300 Day video and that’s simple I want to see by getting a full neiz set of armor with a trimming of every possible trimming I can get on this island it’s a big task but I was up for it unfortunately because this island not

All of them are attainable so let’s have a look what we can and can’t do there are 11 trimmings out there because of the island however the Pillager trimming the jungle temple trimming the Woodland Manion trimming are completely unobtainable Ocean Monuments and shipwrecks in theory are obtainable but

That does require me to leave the island even if I am just staying in the water and so I’m making the decision to say that I can’t leave the island for that cuz I feel it’s a little bit against the rules and so I’m going to say that they

Are unobtainable as well for those who are counting that means six of the 11 trimmings are completely unobtainable so let’s look at the other five I already have the Bastion trimming and I already have one of the n city trimming so there we good to go it’s entirely possible for

Me to get a never Fortress trimming and an ancient city trimming it just requires me to search around to find a new Bastion and an ancient city which I haven’t found this far the stronghold one is a bit more complicated if you remember what I said in the first 100

Days I said I didn’t want to go to a second stronghold hold for an apple because I thought it broke the rules of me running over the land to find myself a second stronghold I still stand by that I don’t want to run to a second stronghold however this was in the

Mindset that I run to the stronghold there is no rule against me digging to the stronghold and so I did what any sane man would do I ran back to the first stronghold took a note of the quarts I mean want to notice how the quarts are pretty much identical which I

Thought was pretty cool and then I ran back to the Overworld and not to the coordinates of my Island basically the plan was to find a second stronghold by digging to it since the first stronghold was to the Northeast if I dig Southwest I should be able to find myself a new

Stronghold it’s a crazy plan but I’m off all right so I started grabbing myself necessary tools stuff that I needed and it was back underground i’ go on day 207 the plan was to run as far as I can through the caves going Southwest of course and then to throw an eye and

After running through the caves as far as I can go I threw it an eye and would you look at that it started going west it is now time for me to dig very far as I I was digging on day 208 I just want to point something out this is the

Coiners of the stronghold and here are my coordinates so it’s safe to say that I had plenty of digging to do in fact 1 and 1 half hours pass on day 212 and well my God oh my God thank you thank you oh thank you all right um chests and

So I began the search and after searching a couple of chests I’m not going to lie I got nervous this very much so but after finding myself the Library Freedom was a really good book oh two cool and now I just got to run back was definitely going to take a minute if I did though so why don’t why don’t I just run through the Nether and so I found myself a lava pool and huh

Hot stuff I can’t believe it took me that long to get that achievement but here we are anyway it was into The Nether it literally saves so much time here we are on day 20 3 and literally after a minute or so I found myself the

Main portal I was easily able to make the four templates needed but I also remembered that I need a per per block to duplicate the nend city trimmings of which I have zero in and so at some point I’m going to have to return to the

End for perp blocks yeah I know well for now let’s see about getting some of the other trimmings out of the way let’s go and find ourselves a never Fortress day 214 and honestly it didn’t take me that long at all I first I got myself a

Wither score which was pretty nice and if we’re going to talk about YouTube look for a second let’s open our first chest that oh there isn’t one in here that wasn’t part of the script it’s all right though this chest that was protected by two wither skeletons did

Have one YouTuber look finally coming back and by the time I got back on day 215 and hey there’s a wanding Traer there oh my God yes yes yes yes and I was just complaining about my YouTuber look the new cherry tree sapling is here

And I know the perfect spot to put it right on the Grass Island aren’t they pretty well let’s chop them up also a little bit of a side note now this Cherry Tree Blossom has just been introduced in this version of Minecraft these things Dro so many saplings it is

Crazy day 216 I made myself four smithing templates we are good to go now I didn’t want to make a big deal about it but I also did get a spruce sapling too when I got the Cherry Tree Blossom I unfortunately didn’t really have anywhere I wanted to put it and so I

Decided why don’t I just make a new island and well put it there after looking for a new spot to put my Island I saw a drowned with a trident now I didn’t get the trident which you know I didn’t that doesn’t really bother me

That much but I don’t know how but look at this new animation that the RS have now I don’t have any texture pack on but that looks really cool I think this is a new thing for 1.20 which is kind of cool I decided to put it next to the bridge

Unfortunately does required me to do a little bit of adjustment to fix the bridge and so I need a little bit of bamboo which of course reminded me that there was something else I wanted to do I want to make myself an automatic bamboo farm so scrapping the plan for

The island on day 217 the plan was to make a simple farm for the bamboo I set up a rail underneath the time to pick up the bamboo and well you know the rest most of the day was just sending up the machine as well as moving the bamboo

Over to the new location and on day 218 well there’s a little bit of Pistons here a little bit of observers over there and a tiny bit of bamboo in the middle and voila it is small and that could probably make it much bigger later

But for right now it does exactly what I needed to do and then I remembered oh yeah I know why I made this thing I need to get a bunch of bamboo to finish the bridge and so after making a small adjustment I bridged over had to wait to

Day 290 to complete it but there you go it’s honestly not too bad and want you look at that Island over there I will officially dub it cherry blossom Island it is so pretty speaking of pretty Islands I wanted to turn the spruce tree island into well an island at the moment

It’s really nothing that’s so I crippy grabbed some grass I also grabbed some dirt and some SS and I got to work I’m going to be honest with you I had no idea what I was doing here it was just a classic Wing It approach the usual took

All of day 220 but I you know what I like it I think it’s an island it looks pretty good the 221 was pretty much just adding the the final touches I had a nice little waterfall to it I got some grass know yeah I think it looks really

Good unfortunately I can’t call it spruce tree island without you know spruce trees and so I grabbed some of those too we’ll ignore the fact that the island is hollow nobody talk about that but I’m going to be honest with you I really like it I think it’s looking good

And now for a surprising problem I had no food but looking for me I had plenty of carrots still in my automatic farm unfortunately for me I had no gold left over and so my golden carrot run was officially over very sad I know and anyway with these little tasks done it

Is time we do the biggest plan of all Tak it away doctor swear to God Dr Haven needs a theme song I mean I mean I need a f so let’s move on so let’s talk never right the Big Goal that I mentioned is I

Want to get a full never right armor set up with every kind of trimming I possibly can but what exactly do I need to pull that off well how much materials and stuff will I need well first let’s look at never right knowing that four pieces of ancient debris makes one neite

Ingot and four ingots of neite make a full set of armor that just require me to get 16 pieces of neite ingots I don’t need the fifth trimming cuz I’ve already done that but I do need four full trimmings which means I need 60 neite Ingus which is 64 pieces of never right

Scraps also need 64 gold but honestly that’s not going to be that important what is important however is the diamonds that I need I am going to need a full suit of diamond armor for each never right setup now that of course that means I need four full setups of

Diamond armor for those who don’t know you need 24 diamonds for a full set of diamond armor so that’s 96 diamonds that I need for that I do already have one piece of leggings one chest plate and one boots so we can take a couple off

That which is now 77 diamonds I need for the armor however we are not done because if you don’t know if you want to duplicate a trimming you need seven diamonds to do that and I need to duplicate a lot of trimmings and considering I only have two out of the

Five trimmings fully done I need to do the other three times each 7 * 3 is 21 so so that is 63 diamonds for all trimmings adding that 63 to the 77 diamonds that I already need I add 140 diamonds for all of the trimmings and the diamond armor however we ain’t even

Close to D because now we need to talk about upgrading the diamond armor ever right armor because you now need a never right upgrader to do that and of course you will need to duplicate that as well which you guessed it requires 7even diamonds per trimming upgrade

Considering I need to do that for four full sets of diamond armor 16 neite upgrades that I am going to need to pull this up which means I’m going to need to duplicate the neite upgrade 15 times so that means I need an extra 105 diamonds for that adding that onto

The original number that is 245 diamonds in total for those who want to do the maths that is Three Stacks and 62 diamonds that’s just for all of it but actually I’m not done because what I’m going to want to do is get one more

Trimming of each of them just in case I want them for the future future which means I need to duplicate the four trimmings One More Time 4 * 7 is 28 which means the total number of diamonds adding on to the 245 that I originally needed is

243 diamonds or four stacks and 17 diamonds are there any questions did you follow along it will be on the final exam I need a lot of diamonds there is some good news though I already have 41 diamonds on me so that 273 now goes down to 232 oh boy I need a

Drink after that one and so on all the twos I went back underground and I was going to start strip mining this was pretty much going to be my life for a while about an hour into digging on day 225 and well deep dark interesting perfect perfect absolutely

Perfect okay now I just going to find me uh one of those trimming boys carefully though I think that’s the best way to go about I’m not going to lie I wasn’t very careful here I was running around SP Waring wardens at least my look was with me because after

Searching my first chest I have found the ancient city triming and then I stupidly opened more okay I think I got away my God that was terrifying and I got the trimming let’s go also seven diamonds technically so yeah good stuff and so once I left the ancient city it was

Pretty much then onto strip mine City basically between day 226 for a very long time I was mining all the diamonds I could never been so so grateful for Fortune but here we are so I have nearly been strip Bing for about 3 hours just

Under it’s been about 2 and a half or so um I am very grateful that uh YouTube exists or I’ll be born out my mind that being said let’s let me show you where I am um I’m in the in the last stretch uh if I’ve done my maths correctly so

Obviously you DK the seven from the thing I need four stacks and 10 diamonds which means I’m only 14 diamonds short from completing this task which is relieving to say say the least I I think I’ll be done in the next Diamond vein I have found another Asian City great

Probably be done by the next Diamond vein I’m hoping so we shall see here hoping that I find that diamond vein soon you know what I’m going to find it right now ladies and gentlemen watch Haven and just get his YouTube look in

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 two one and it’s right here I’m wrong it’s actually right here it was a good try anyway let’s that’s mine by the time we was done it was day 234 where uh well 64 64 64 64 27 and 7 that works out to

290 diamonds which is uh more than enough to everything I wanted to do so now that we’re done uh I should go back I do want to quickly check one thing I don’t want to accidentally leave this wave without the thing that I need is

This one oh Just DE like and I returned on day 235 I was back and boy was I happy to not have to M any more diamonds and now I’ve got to cook myself some food and that’s when I realized that the golden apple that I found in the ancient city

Wasn’t just a golden apple it was an inched Golden Apple which I thought was pretty cool and just like that I have now gotten all of the trimmings all three of them maxed out which only leaves the end one as a reminder I need to get the per block which I have not

And there is no time like the present so I can’t believe I returning to the end to get a single per block play we move on I got into the outer end by day 236 I’m not going to lie it was just a bit of a trick until I found myself an n

City and it didn’t take me too long at all to find myself the n city it was day 237 and I got myself a stack of purple blocks okay goodbye and on day 238 would you look at that we had gotten ourselves all the trimmings and now we just need

To find ourselves a Bastion to get the upgrade packs from the neite and we will be good to go in no time but for now I definitely need a break from doing that so I decided to have a quick look around in my Islands I still have to say it

Blossom Island looks really good I also had a look on day 239 of the bamboo and don’t you look at that that’s not too shabby at all now I should definitely collect some Cherrywood however because there was so many trees on here when I tell you this took a while well this

Took a while there is so much wood so much wood and by the time I was done would you look at that look how many logs I got Jesus there was a lot here and why did I collect this wood well on day 240 I wanted to set myself up a

Build to show off my never armor in the near future now I’ve never worked with this wood palette before would you believe I mean he’s a brand new wood so I was honestly just messing around for a while just deciding what doors and doesn’t look good by day 241 high of the

Inside completed I’m going to be honest with you I quite liked it I thought it looked pretty good and then it was onto the walls and I’ll be honest with you the walls was a real bit of a hassle it took me forever to get the walls looking

How I like them like looking good and I’m going to be honest with you I don’t think it looks fantastic by the end of it and on day 242 it was onto the roof now luckily for me most of the roofs on this this island have a similarish build

On the roof so it wasn’t too hard to just copy that style and we are done so just the Final Touch let’s put some cherry leaves in the roof and add the pedals falling really think it added to the build just got to put me in some

Lanterns I mean it’s not a hate we’ve got over this is our Haven build if I don’t Point lanterns on day 243 I noticed that the bamboo farmer case it was having pieces fall out or fall on the wall so he wasn’t catching it all as

So I decided to put some more wooden planks on top of it to make it fall out I really want to make this look better in the near future but for right now this is all it really needs to be and then for no other reason than I just

Wanted to I decided that I wanted to make my bow power five did break my envil though rip that was the first Anvil and only Anvil that’s been made on this world I didn’t even have enough iron to replace it which definitely sucks which uh did give me an idea

Though that why haven’t I made an iron farm yet I should definitely do that do I have a name tag though would oh I do have a name tag all right let’s do this it was day 244 where I was following a simple YouTube tutorial on how to do

This I started Gathering the blocks needed and putting them in this shulka I was done except for beds where uh only one w h well luckily for me I knew the entire time that Shepherds actually traded beds and I didn’t totally miss that in the last video so let’s uh let’s

Not point that out and poke fun at haen that’d be sad just need to get some good trades where um shears huh well I guess I’m in need of shears and they trade W since what I looked at the screenshot they did not trade wool in the last 100

Days I don’t know what you can say you know what it doesn’t matter though I was able to trade myself a bunch of beds and it is time to work on the iron farm day 245 and even with the bamboo increase I have no idea how a bamboo managed to get

All the way up there and so I started making it even higher let’s start building this and to be honest with you with the iron farm it was pretty much just a case of following the tutorial so this was a m kind of boring let’s skip

Ahead and 2 days later this is what we have got now as far as I’m aware I already seen it work so I’m hoping I think you can already see it working is that IR Golem it is but this has been running for literally 5 minutes look at

That look at that that bad boy this is this is great and uh yeah I can now just leave that to basically generate myself some iron never have to go iron caveen again which is fantastic so I’m going to be 100% honest with you lovely viewer at

Home uh I’ve sort of just been like delaying because the next two tasks wherever it be to search for Bastion or wherever it be to search for neite are both going to be extremely long tasks so I just keep doing little tasks to sort of distract myself like that which for

The record I don’t think I’ve seen it work once also I really don’t oh actually there is a single up in there unfortunately this is not working how I would like it to which is a which is a darn shame but I mean I kind of expected

It to not work build this which at the moment kind of looks terrible but to be fair it’s working like a charm this thing is shooting our bamboo but I think I’ve delayed it long enough I made myself four full sets of diamond armor

And uh well once I have this set with it as well that will fill out the five armor stands in the Pink House of loveliness but yeah soon enough I will have my five armor sets um I mean this quite Frank there’s no way for me to to

Go about it over then to just do it so I have one idea it’s not the biggest thing in the world but it’ll do oh you can give me paintings I’ll buy I’ll buy some paintings not too shabby I have a lot of uh lot of wool so bed bombing in the

Nether will be good one thing worth noting and I will definitely note it is that in the ne chest I do have three neite scraps so that means I only need 61 I am going to go into the ne and get 61 pieces of agent debris 240 I spent

The next 2 days bed bombing and well listen I have always been an advocate that mining has been better than bed bombing but I decided to try bed bombing as a change um you’d think that it would go well for me you think like I’m literally halfway doing my best I

Haven’t had a single piece of uh that was wrong so this is my last bed moment of true yep nothing so after all of that bed bombs probably about maybe 50 beds I did not get a single piece of Asian debris that was a complete an UT waste

Of time I cannot believe I didn’t get a single piece well I’m just going to go back to the classic way of course of course 30 seconds into mining like naturally and I’ve course I fomation debr I mean it it would have work whatever you know what

Whatever now usually when I go neite mining I only need 24 pieces of ancient debris to get it that’s enough for six ingots that’s all I need however in this case I need 61 pieces which is nearly triple the amount so this was definitely going to take a minute now earlier in

This series it took me nine Minecraft days to get 24 pieces of ancient de brid so when I tell you that in 13 days I got 61 that honestly felt like a massive win I was Finding ancient debris like crazy and by day 263 I got myself back and even after all

This work I still am not done that’s crazy it was great to at least see the neite cook and just like that I have obtained 16 pieces of neite now this is 1.9 we’d be done here we can make all the armor and that there you go but uh

No we’re not now we got to find ourselves a new new Bastion so on day 264 Mama Mia here we go again it’s good musical so I need to find myself a new Bastion as I say the problem is I’ve searched quite a lot around me so uh

Yeah I got to head out quite far so we have ventured far it’s day 266 so I’ve been going for a good 40 minutes and my coordinates are I’m about to reach about a th000 over 1,000 blocks away from a main portal so this is definitely new

Terrain area um I’m just going to keep going until I find Sebastian nothing else to do in here really I thought about it as well and maybe I’ll do this next but if I could get myself elytra and a bunch of fireworks this’ be so much easier to travel now I already have

An elytra and getting like mending and stuff on it wouldn’t be too bad but getting bunch of fireworks to do it it would be kind of a pain I don’t really have an easy access to gunpowder and I ain’t about to build a gunpowder Farm because the last time I did that it

Worked out terribly prob have some Gunpowder left over from my days over here but besides the point we have to run around for probably a while looking for this Bastion so uh yeah get comfy people that could be in here for a while still going on day 267 this is uh

Definitely going to take a minute oh now from what I know the never right upgrade has a chance of spawning in any Bastion but it has 100% chance of spawning in a treasure Bastion what is a treasure Bastion I have no idea so I’m hoping this is one of them but I guess

We’ll have a look around and see what we could find well I’m pretty sure that’s the last chest in here and um there is no never upgrade so oh got to keep going yes yes yes yes okay than the Lord himself oh oh silk touch nice oh it’s over thank God it’s

Over oh my God oh my God no no no no no no no no no no I just got it I just got it you are not killing me now okay that was only slightly scary what day are we on 279 we have traveled over 3,000 blocks to get to this point but

Here we are I think this was the way I came or whatever so I pretty sure I set off the equivalent of 15 Minecraft days ago and obviously you can’t sleep in the nether so that means that’s what 20 * 15 been about 4 hours I would say since

Since I began this crazy adventure probably longer now that I think about it but the point is we’re done and we can finally head back home which is this way like I say the only problem is though is that I’m very far out so you’ll have to give me a minute I’m so

Close oh oh portal you have no idea how happy I am right now it took so long it has been exactly 20 Minecraft days but we are home we are home oh it’s been forever since I’ve seen these luscious lands and we got it the neite upgrade

Template this is going to be a good minute oh my God I can’t believe I’m actually doing this so I believe it’s just is it with never no this the wrong way it Is there we go 20 I have 20 oh my God I cannot believe I’m finally doing this oh man here we go then so what do I to so you you one two 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 and 16 legendary all right then

We’re done with you I’ve also decided I’m going to make each one of them like their own color so we’ll start with the ey and we’re going to make you purple I guess helmet chest plate leggings boots one done uh Spire will make you gold helmet chest plate leggings boots

Perfect Ward we’ll use emeralds helmet chest plate leggings boots and then rib we have Redstone for a helmet chest plate leggings and boots there we go there’s only one other quick thing I want to do now I’m never going to actually use this armor in the in the grand scheme of things but

Anything that doesn’t have a level on it I just want to quickly get an enchant just for the effect and it took so very long so very you have no idea how long it took but here we are ladies and gentlemen uh and we you know what I’ll

Even I’ll even throw in my armor as well just so I could show it all in one go and would you look at the that would you look at that this is my life work this is it ladies and gentlemen I kind of feel like I’ve done all right here I

Mean you guys are welcome to disagree with me I might probably change these signs to make them look a little bit better but right now I think I’ve done all right I think that this is pretty good most are definitely going to change I don’t like the way this looks so let

Me quickly go ahead and fix it on day 284 I replaced all the signs with hanging signs it did take me a second because of for M but you know we got there in the end perfect perfect perfect perfect you know what would be cool and

I don’t think I would be able to do it is if I could change the color of the signs like writing so I have like yellow for this one or red for actually I think I would be able I’m going to go see if I could do that oh my God okay

Uh and so I grabbed myself some red dime and some yellow dye blue dye wasn’t an issue either and lime Dy wasn’t an issue either you see aul aware you can cook this to get lime die I was fully aware last time I didn’t want lime I wanted

Green I still appreciate you guys all pointing out in the comments though and purple was really easy as well and would you look at that also just a quick check on the iron farm things were going really really good and quickly going back to the comments that you all ped

Earlier a lot of people told me that with the beacons if I put yellow glass on top of blue glass it would make green and uh you call that green guys really I mean I tried it the other way around it didn’t work uh think you might think you

Guys are wrong on this one unless I’m making a mistake but uh yeah it’s definitely not green I head back on Underground on day 286 of course I needed dirt I mean why else would I had underground I wanted to make a new new island and look for me there was a

Bounty of dirt down here so uh not going to struggle for this one whatsoever day 287 I had a nice little square in added some fence posts and some hills and now it’s just got to make it look well islanded and it’s not perfect in fact it’s probably the worst of the islands

That I have but this is what I got I made this little bridge over there and uh yeah just a it’s should be a nice little place for the chickens to hang out you know how it is um it’s still a beach biome uh speaking of let me let me

Go grab my chicken friends and just like that our chicken Army begins I need to give King Pedro a phone I’ll BR back it is a throne for a king there you go the world’s smallest throne and the only person who’s not on the throne is the

King so uh yeah are we officially done with a chicken Island I feel like uh maybe there’s some more I can in the future but as far as word the chicken should be able to get out of that but yeah I think that’s probably going to be

The last build on the on the server for for this video so I guess I’m going to go back to uh map building to get another layout of the land and build my 300 days map day 291 and I did just that getting myself four Maps I made a 300

Map board but this time out of Cherrywood I fancy to change I don’t know before I did log them in though I knew I needed to get some paths down almost forgot to do that one not going to lie so it was back to De slating and

Putting them down on day 292 I did have one cool idea thank get myself some banners I can put the names of the locations on the map and I feel like that’d be a really cool ad to the world took me until the next day to complete

It and now I was done and then on day 294 I didn’t want the banners just sitting around the island so I decided to take them all down don’t worry though they will stay on the map and with that we were done well ladies and gentlemen I think we’ve done it all

295 this is the day that we do our final Island Tour and I mean final because I didn’t expect to get to 300 no way in the world I’m getting to 400 let’s let’s do a little bit of a tour whyde don’t we let’s start on this side of the island

First we’ll work our way over here and then move to the left obviously the never Port don’t look at that but this this act building I’ll give you a little bit of a fun fact I was actually trying to make it look a little bit like a

Helmet um obviously I don’t think he really pulled off that well but now what can you do my five gray armor sets to the eye trim with uh amethyst the W trim with emeralds the snout trim which is the trim that I have been using with

Diamond on the rib trim with the red stone and the Spire trim with the gold I love this building the little petle effects from the roof really help to it it’s really simple it’s a really simple build but uh you know to have it be the build that really shows off you know

Everything that I pretty much worked on this has been half of my work has been this one building and everything inside of it I I love it Pig step down so don’t worry we’ll come back the C trees I don’t think I touched this time obviously we still got the Axel lles and

The storage hook the enchanter all that’s kind of the same uh but these two things with the two new ones a lot of what I’ve done this 100 days is I basically automated everything I I mean I filled it up with bamboo that’s how good this has been and just a reminder

It only goes too high I mean I can’t even look into anymore cuz it’s that high this thing great tutorial shout out to the person who made it um plenty like the iron has been streaming in it’s been streaming in even when I’ve not been looking at it was a really simple design

I’ll have to remember that design for future builds and stuff this is the big disappointment of the 100 days is the the mob grinder just didn’t really work I’m going to be honest with you when I built it I wasn’t 100% confident it was

Going to work the idea was if I build it over the ocean maybe it would help a bit mob ground is really only work in Worlds that are incredibly limited on spawns and this world has an entire world to spawn and even if I am just on the small

Island I said at the end of the 200 days that I really wanted to add more to this house to make it look better but I just never did I don’t mind it’s fine so this is where we started on day 100 with uh the the Farms there and literally what

One two build there’s an auto at the pigstep area and the Farms we we we buil quite a bit you know improving the Farms I mean even the melons added a couple more builds like the Villager Hood and the storage Hood even made a bridge to this farm and you know still stuff’s

There but if we look at it now oh my there’s just so much there’s so much on here yeah we’ B we changed the bamboo Farm the iron Farms there we put the or we put the at Le he named it the broken mob grinder cuz it is we have King

Pedro’s Island the spruce Island and the cherry tree island um there’s just so so much on this island now that I’ve done this is the most amount of work I think I’ve point to a series obviously we can’t you know pass up the the thing without at least saying hi to our King

Where is our King there he is King Pedro oh hell uh this is the stupidest I can’t believe oh egg spruce tree island is just a nice little island that I feel like adds to it I was thinking about doing like similar to what I did for

Cherry tree island by having a bunch of spruce trees but honestly I just like it if it’s just limited and then of course cherry tree island which let me just say oh en let me just say I I I kind of blasted through this 100 days I’ve done

A lot of it over the past week these cherry trees obviously I imagine they’ll get changed because the amount of saplings that Dro from them is crazy but I love the cherry trees so much I think they’re so cool we’re done that’s it it’s 300 days in you know very soon time

Honestly I’m just going to kill the time until we get there like compared to where this island started with look how much we have done again I don’t think I’ll get to 400 Days this Series has been fantastic though and I’m really grateful to um you know get to survival

Island out there but ladies and gentlemen if you have watched 100 200 or if this is your first 300 if you’re somehow still at the end of this video thank you so much thank you so so much it has been a privilege and an honor to

Start 2023 on this island and just to have everything work so well it’s it’s been fantastic a fantastic start of the year but yeah I mean there’s there’s not really much else to say there really really isn’t I’m sort of back at the say

Whato was at the end of 200 where um you know I I I’ve done everything I wanted to do a couple days early and it was a bit of a grind at times getting the neite and the trimmings and everything but I I I got to admit this I’ve L this

Series this has been my favorite longterm series out of every 100 days um and who knows who knows again I’ll ask again because I did last time if you get this video to about 5k likes just like you did the last one I’ll do 400 Days

I’ll do 400 and then we’ll do 500 and if we get to 500 I’ll make you this deal if you get if if we get to 5K likes and we get to 400 and then let’s say we get to 5K likes and we get to 500 after 500

I’ll do a th000 I don’t think that will happen prove me wrong people this small island that looks like India could potentially have 1,000 days survived on it I don’t think I’ll get there but if I do I’m sure we can find some stuff to do

All right then I guess it’s time for us to uh oh my God there’s a Siamese cat in there there’s another cat I should get some fish I’m sure I’ve got some oh there you go should eat the perfect spot as well let’s go guess we’ll uh wait to

300 and wait for it wait for it d a 300 we did it boys and and girls and those who you know don’t really have a prep you know you are your nonbinary Sops and um well I mean I ended 100 days like this I

Ended 200 days like this so you know for a fact I’m ending 300 days like this we back baby welcome to survival island 400 days now let me stop by saying 300 days blew me away thank you for the support of the episode I just realized I should

Get my armor now I do have quite a few plans that I want to do in this particular video uh some big projects that include you know I’ll I’ll let somebody special I I’ll let somebody special take over that when the time comes however there’s one thing I want

To quickly mention to you first of all thank you for watching that’s really cool of you and second of all if you missed the ending to 300 days so the last video I did in this world where I did all of this there’s a lot of stuff

Here you could pause you could have a look there’s a lot of stuff here I said that if the series keeps continuing I would go up to 500 days so I’d do this video and then I’d do 500 Days that’s the plan however after 500 days I said

I’d do 1,000 which means 500 Days in one video crazy I know however for that to happen I need to know that the series is supported I need to know that I’m not wasting my time doing it so ladies and gentlemen video gets to 100,000 views or

Gets 5K likes I will in instantly start working on 500 days so you know you want do you want 5 you want 500 Days like the video tell your friends share share your buddies that that’s the way to do it enough daily D and L and gentlemen I’d

Like to introduce you to a very special friend who’s going to explain the three main goals I have for this 100 days take it away Dr Haven hand guys I’d like to personally thank you for keeping this series alive like seriously without it I

Wouldn’t have a job I have kids I have a cat I mean how am I going to give my cat indans if I don’t have any money from this job anyway so what are these great plans that my better looking less intelligent half is talking about well

At the start of the 300 days I made myself three big BLS the first one which is the smallest part of the bunch is to make the ne portal look a bit better at the moment it just looks like well this there’s not really much to it so it

Really needs an improvement to make the island look better the other two plans somewhat come hand in hand but they are both separate and massive tasks for those who remember the last video I quickly covered all of the new features that were added to 1.20 like the sniffer

Suspicious sand and blossom trees but I did miss something that at the time I thought was kind of irrelevant there is a new mob head you can get the piglin mob head I didn’t really think about this m but it did now give me an idea

Wouldn’t it be kind of cool to click all mob schools in Minecraft and make a Monument similar to how I made for the never ey armor so that was the ultimate Big Goal here unfortunately for me that does require me to do something even bigger because I need a trident for the

Few people that don’t know the only way to get a mob head is to use a supercharged creeper to kill that selected mob and the only way to get a supercharged creeper is to zap it with lightning now I could use copper rods and light the creepers that way but that

Just kind of be boring so instead what I’m going to do is I’m going to attempt to make a trident Farm something that I’ve never done before andm is only for one Trident but maybe I’ll find some other uses in the future and it’s probably the easiest way for me to get a

Trident now so so many of you in the comments like the reason the spawner is not working is because it’s on half slaps uh and I’m here to tell you that’s not true so let me quickly work my way oh first of all there you go actually

Wasn’t that a of course zombie villager of course there is how much hustle was that well first of all there you go stuff is actually spawning there you go stuff is spawning now unfortunately there’s not much as you can see and it is still dropping down there now this

Should work and it it doesn’t matter if it’s on half slabs because there’s two different kinds of half slab as you can see this half slab is it looks normal it’s on the normal thing however if you have a half slab like this where it’s

Half a block in that case it won’t spawn so these will spawn perfectly fine however the reason this is not working is because everywhere below me right now there will be caves and the only way for me to get this mob spawn to fully work it is to fully light up every single

Cave below me and unfortunately that’s not going to happen and though I do appreciate all your input on why this isn’t working it’s not working because there’s too many areas for the mobs to spawn below me that’s the reason why this is not working and so it was on day

302 that I got to work this trident Farm was actually massive following with the tutorial that I found on YouTube and I started the day by collecting every blocks that I could I got everything I needed except the building blocks now I’m not joking when I say this this Farm requires

5,910 building blocks to complete or 90 fre stacks of building blocks that’s also ignoring the extra six stacks of slabs that I need to complete it so I’m going to need a lot of building blocks now the most blocks I had at the time when I started this was actually deep

Slate with 11 stacks which means if I go for deep slate I need 882 more Stacks to complete it yeah I know and there was really no time like the present and so I went down under and started digging I did do a little clever and I decided to

Dig around Diamond layer cuz you know diamonds are always useful you never know you could get some on day 303 and about 20 minutes later I had got myself 18 stacks of deep slave so if I’ve done my maths correctly everything in my inventory right now is the equivalent of

43 stacks of deep slave and just a reminder that I need 93 I already have 11 back home so that is 55 which means I need to do all of this again just to get the enough deep slate to make this Farm if it doesn’t work I’m going to uh stop

I need you I’m going to stop the series forever and that’ll be that and just to show you on day 304 it was enough to fill a double chest anyway it was back to diging and let me show show you on day 305 there is 38 more Stacks giving

Me a grand total of 93 stacks of deep slate I had completed the Deep slave mining though I still needed six stacks of slabs andm though this was much easier cuz I decided to just get normal Cobblestone for that one and the best part about it cuz I was much higher open

And I was close to the beac and I was able to get the hze which made this super super simple day 306 I moved all of my equipment over to the location where I’m going to put the Trident farm and it was time to get to work you know

This was a very big build so I’m just going to quickly go over the highlights of everything that was needed firstly I used all of this scaffolding to get myself to y200 and then I had to get 22 more blocks into the sky I think already

On day 307 you can probably tell how big this is going to be and it is definitely going to take some time I was able to get the floors in and I started working on some of the walls day 308 and the sign placing was awful there was no

Cheap way to speed up this process rather than just doing it in this area is quite big so this also took quite a minute it’s going to be funny when I complete all of this by the way and uh it doesn’t work work I mean is that a

Spoiler is that foreshadowing you have to wait and see I had to completed by day 309 let’s see what’s up next H got to raise all of this by 69 blocks are you kidding me at least I can get a good view of the world up here why is the

in a circle now when I tell you there is no quick way for me to do this there is no quick way for me to do this so uh anybody mind if I just do do a little bit of this and I okay 45 minutes

Later it’s day 313 and we are done now two last things to do first thing we need to get a temporary floor in and a out of blocks of course I am had it complete on day 314 and the water was down next job is to remove the floor and

Just like that we’re done at least once to get the roof in now I did actually place the shers at the bottom of this farm so I was planning to go down and get them however the drown spawning had already begun so I wasn’t actually able

To get them from this way not going to lie though pretty happy about the fact it was already working it wasn’t too hard to get the shulkers out on day 35 it was in fact very simple to do and now it’s time to begin the murder process

Now I do only have loing too so this may take a minute are you serious right now really okay all right then I decided that this wasn’t enough though I mean I made this I made to get something out of it so I tried to get myself a couple of

Levels I went to go and get myself a mending book and then put it on the Trident and then started getting levels first I try to fix my pickaxe and then it was on Trident it’s not as good as an Enderman Farm but you know what it does

The job and on day 3 116 just like that it was full I’m going to be honest there’s a very high chance I’ll never use this again but to be fair if I ever need levels it is right there but there is a better way for me to get levels and

That is straight into the ne so I’m going to go and mine some quads day 317 I was quite close to my goal of level 30 simple reason on is I wanted to get channeling on my Trident that would give me the enchant that would allow me to

Zap a creeper with lightning and so I was pretty happy to get to level 30 on this day however I decided let’s keep going just to be safe cuz you know if I don’t get it the first time then well at least I’ve got the extra levels to do so

By the end of day 318 I had got myself 35 levels and then I decided to call the quit I got back before the night and quickly stored my things away because it was time to ench day 319 and here we go oh well that’s unfortunate all right

Take two here we go oh that’s unfortunate all right take three this is the one really and we’re doubt of levels okay back to the ne I’m just going to skip to day 322 cuz I’m not going to make you watch that again basically I got myself back up to 36 levels anyway

Let’s try I Tred it again you are taking the absolute do I really need to explain what happens next I don’t think so this is a joke this is a joke I don’t believe this is happening that’s a chant nine am I what just ch did they remove

Channeling we got back on the night of day 329 now surely surely this can’t happen again oh my God I’m not going to lie I actually paused at this point I actually spent a good 5 minutes on the internet just to make sure that chading wasn’t

Removed from 1.20 it it wasn’t I just I just got extremely unlucky day 331 I just want to make it clear that I’m not trying to skip days but there’s nothing I can do unless you want be go then I went to the ne and then I mind quad so

Please forgive me on that one there was a little bit of luck on day 332 because I got so much lapis in the first 100 days I’ve just been leaving lapis around so this really wasn’t too hard to get plus with the fortune I very quickly got

Myself some lapis all right then here we go again oh my god oh thank you Lord Jesus I am done with Minecraft for a while do you want to know the funny thing about this I went into the ne originally on day 316 it is now day 332 so it took 16 days

To get channeling I started trying to get the Trident on day two built all of that up there and got the Trident on day 15 which means it took me 13 days to get the Trident and 16 days to get channeling I I can’t make it up if I

Wanted to now the question is how long is it going to take until he starts thundering boy at least now I can have a nice relaxing time building a better portal I did have an idea to make it look like a NE cave is the best way I

Can describe it it was a lot of testing and you know I’m Messing around a little bit and whilst I was finishing it started raining what was it oh my God and it was on like Donkey Kong let’s go get some skulls I firstly very quickly got myself the creeper

Skull after that it wasn’t too hard to get the zombie skull the skeleton admitt was a little bit of a pain but we got there in the end now I did actually pause my game here because the next one is going to be the big one take it away

Doctor now going into this challenge I already had a Wither Skull and a dragon head skull and because of of the Trident explosions let’s call it I had now got myself a Creeper zombie and skeleton skull which means there is only one skull left in the game which is the

Piglin Skull and when I tell you this is the most difficult skull to get this is the most difficult skull to get so there are two pretty simple options the first option is to take a creeper into The Nether now unfortunately creepers don’t spawn in the Nether and neither do

Thunderstorm so my only option would be to get a supercharged creeper putting into The Nether and then blow up a piglin in the ne the problem with that is the moment I put him into the portal obviously I would have to go through the portal and it would be very close to

Each over the moment I come through the portal and there’s a very high chance he could explode and kill me option two is to bring a piglin to the Overworld and get him to explode by The Supercharged graper however this is also a problem because once a pigin enters the

Overworld after a very quick period they actually turn themselves back into Pigman both options kind of suck but I decided that the easier option would be to get the creeper into the nevera because then I’m not on a time limit as long as I can avoid the initial

Explosion all right let’s get you into the ne well that failed all right then take two nice and now for the fun part I’m not going to lie my plan was to just go through the portal and Sprint away as quick as possible hoping the creeper doesn’t explode along the way incredibly

It actually worked all right then with a pigin nearby let’s do this and well it was quite simple first try let’s go I returned home and it was day 333 the thunderstorm literally Ended as soon as I was doing which was kind of poetic that’s the right word the piglin head

Looks kind of funny but they are all here a job well done now we just got to build a bunch of stuff first though I do need to fix my eyland a little bit there may have been a fail the Creeper explosion here or there so I’m just

Taking a second to make sure that that’s all fixed and then it was to fix the portal that I kind of destroyed design one wasn’t really a big fan of and design two was it was okay it got the point across just want to point

Something out on day 334 um you see the grass block on top of the tree I think that’s just a glitch grass blocks or dirt blocks can spawn on top of cherry trees I don’t know don’t know how we got up there anyway for an idea that I

Wanted to do to make the skull Monument I wanted to get myself some Spruce Wood so most today was pretty much me just cutting down the spruce trees and then waiting for more to grow and I did have myself a stack of logs by day 335 I also

Grabbed myself a little bit of wool brown wool was tradable which was perfect cuz that was the kind of wool that I was looking for and I got myself to work now what is the build that I’m thinking of doing here it’s really simple actually I can get every score in

The game except a player schore that’s not possible without using commands or creative mode but that doesn’t mean I can’t make one now does this skull look terrible yes yes it does but considering the blocks that I have options for you could definitely tell it’s at least

Supposed to be Steve just a very dodgy looking Steve I don’t know it is going to require me to get a bunch more Brown wall and a little bit more Spruce Wood to finish it off luckily on day 336 the brown one was still easy I still had

Plenty of emeralds left over and the spruce trees were growing so again that wasn’t any issue either and well there you go I’m not sure if we could call it Steve maybe his cousin may I don’t know maybe like it’s Charles or something I I don’t know now on day 337 my fiance

Actually gave me a really good idea you can create a sort of head display for them by putting the heads inside glasses using a couple of pistons and such I did find the tutorial on how to make this online but unfortunately for me it doesn’t work because it requires snow

Layers and unfortunately well I don’t think I need to explain why that’s not possible so I did the next best thing I picked a block that best represents each M and I put it in there as like the base of the skull and I must say all the

Skulls are in now pretty happy with this I did a little bit of tweaking on day 338 on the inside to make it look a little less Bland it wasn’t amazing but I could happily say that I’m done with this build I mean I got all the schools

In Hardcore Minecraft I’m sure there’s a hardcore episode out there that is similar to this and uh well I’m pretty happy with it to say the least and just like that the two big tasks that went hand inand together we’re done there is now one other task that I decided to do

At this point basically the Villager hood that I had I wanted to make a second H that allowed Librarians trading as sort of a Trader Hall at least that was a future plan I wasn’t interesting doing it right now for now let’s just take a food break I got to admit there’s

Something really really relaxing about placing props even 300 days in I did do a couple more trades on day 339 my main goal was just get a couple of spam M books these diamond tools are pretty good so I want to do my best to improve them and after adding bending I thought

That if I could do to the drown spawner I could maybe get them a couple levels up get them improved but after standing there for a Solid 5 minutes I realized that this wasn’t the play and so it was on day 340 that I returned to the never

But all the levels and all that schnitzel you know how it is and by the end of the day they all had full durability which was pretty good I did quickly return home on day 341 only for a food break before it was back to the

Never this time I was going for never right now usually when I M never right I only get enough for all of my armor my sword and my pickaxe but I thought it’d be cool for me to get a couple extra pieces for my extra tools and so I was

Looking for 11 pieces of neite I already had one spare Rover and 11 would get me to 12 and it was pretty quick All Things Considered day 344 and I got myself 11 pieces of ancient debris day 345 and all this never G to waste really should have

Done something with it now some of you are probably wondering now obviously I’ve got the shovel and the axe so that’s obviously two pieces of never right but what’s what’s the third piece for well that’s really simple add one super good enchant later with a little

Little bit of mending and this may be the best hoe I’ve ever had in fact this may be the best set of tools and armor that I’ve ever had if you are well I mean the swords not that great but we can work on that a little later day 346

And for a while now I’ve wanted to make a couple of changes to the island to make it look better a couple of the builds are just kind of BL and there’s some other stuff that I want to change so I decided to work up that at this

Point let’s start with the bamboo Farm I added myself a little bit of a roof made a couple of adjustments to the walls and I have to say I think it already looks pretty good I mean I’m I’m not complaining about it and then on day 347

I decid to do with the biggest change to the wall now as you all know I’ve been using deep slit Cobble as like a pathway between all of the locations on the island and I decided that I really didn’t like the Deep slay so what I

Decided to do was I decided to use oak logs on a stripped basis to replace them and make the island look a bit better but it does require me to remove all the Deep SL so I’m going to do that quickly I had to spend all the 348 doing this as

Well it was pretty much a day of me placing and stripping all of the oak locks it took me longer than I expected mly but I have to say I think it looks much better than the Deep slave couple I like it at least and that’s the most

Important thing what I think and then on 349 I decided it’s time to work on the bamboo house I’ve been saying this for a while that I wanted to make the top side of it similar to the bottom side and so I raised the bamboo pillars up fixed the

Roof a little bit which was pretty simple and yeah I think it was a definite worthwhile upgrade looks so much better than it originally did after that on day 350 I spent a little bit of time looking around the island to see if there’s anything else I wanted to

Upgrade and to be honest with you there’s not really anything extra that I wanted to do all the buildings at that point in my opinion was at an acceptable level now let me let me stop you from commenting in my opinion they’re an acceptable level I’m not a pro Builder

We already know this but you know in my opinion every building of the island is AOK I did however want to do one more thing on day 351 so the first thing I did was I went to go and trade as much wool as I could on day 352 I collected

All the wool grabbed a little bit of this a little bit of that and here it is on day 355 what did I build did you ask I guess you’ll have to uh guess you have to wait and see guess you have to watch the entire video to find out isn’t this

Uh isn’t this a tricky moment for you you have to watch the entire video oh Lord isn’t isn’t that unfortunate all right let’s move on now one thing I did take note of whilst I was looking around was my limited called 33 limited amount of diamonds and for future plans whether

It’s in this video or potentially a future video I’m going to need a lot of diamonds to work and so I went back underground to go and M myself some diamonds when I started on day 356 my plan was really really simple I’m just going to strip mine I was was aiming for

About a stack of diamonds and I started pretty well getting 16 on my first day of G and then on day 357 I got myself two more veins and thanks to the fortune 3 I had now up to 40 diamonds now I didn’t actually find any more diamonds

On day 358 but I do have a question for you the viewer what is your opinion on me covering days like this nothing happened I just stripped mine the entire time but is this a day that I should quickly cover and then move on or should

I just skip days like this you know I mean both are good options for me I’ve done a bit of both in recent times so let me know what you think down below should I skip days where nothing happens or should I try and include them just a

Little bit even if I’m just saying hey nothing happened anyway moving on got a new vein of diamonds on day 359 I had Now 51 diamonds and it was about day 360 I believe I don’t know I didn’t check my F3 at this point where I got my final

Vein and it was a giant vein as well believe it was about 12 diamonds in total which got me to 79 diamonds I was pretty happy with that let’s head home well I can tell you it’s by day 361 I was home and sell in and would you look

At all those diamonds pretty damn good I also noticed a hole in the Villager house which I have no idea how that got there wasn’t issued to fix it was a bit weird and then I saw myself a llama two llamas oh there’s a traiter over here

Cool and hey he had some Cactus which you know that’s pretty cool as well my thank you for this great trade this day is a little bit of murder don’t worry I took the llamas out as well now I did try to sell up a very basic Auto cactus

Farm I just don’t know if it’s going to work so I decided to watch it I just spent a couple of minutes just watching it to see if it would work and it looks like the moment the cactus grew it would instantly break now I wasn’t sure if

This was correct so I quickly watched a tutorial online and it looks like it’s the same way the only difference that they don’t use blocks they use fences instead and so I decided to change it so it’s just a fence there this is about as basic as you’ll see when it comes to

Cactus farms but I I what do I need Cactus for let’s be honest day 363 and I’m going to be honest with you I’ve been putting it off for a while I think it’s finally time that I build that villager book trading Hall I decided to

Use alaa wood again since that was was what I used for the original villager house and there was a zombie inside of the trees which I thought was kind of funny anyway one deforestation later and we can begin to be 100% honest with you

I had no idea what I was doing in here I was just going to wing the build but if I’ve winged it before then I can wing it again I can if I’ve wounded it before wound a word I had good progress done on day 364 the idea was to have a little

Department so we shall call them and that the villagers can live in and obviously I can trade them whenever I do that I am going to need a couple of beds though quite a few actually so there’s nothing a little tread he can fix with

That one I will say and with the beds in on day 365 Le turns were completed I did need a little bit of wood to finish the walls and roof and we’ll be good to go I had the walls complete on day 366 putting a

Little bit of glass so it’s not just a dark tomb for the boys also some separators were put in so the villagers went all clumped together all in their own separate departments and next to the roof it was simple design to copy the other one pretty much just put some some

Slabs in here and some logs in here very simple roof design but I quite like it and it was day 367 where I completed the roof and he started thundering like straight in the day so I was able to sleep and skip the next day which was kind of cool day 368

I decided to add a couple of final touches on the inside and we are good to go now for what will be the worst part of this 100 day adventure getting the villagers in the Departments was a massive hassle here’s me doing you one of them by getting a mine cart and

Getting them in there me trying to get that oh this is four times speed this was the worst and I have to do this 19 more times and well this was another portion of my life that I didn’t want to do but I guess I have to I am not even

Going to tell you the hassle that it was to get this done day 375 between breeding The Villages that I’ve needed to breed and moving them around we have now got them more I am going to turn this off immediately I’m going to be honest I haven’t really

Looked at any of the trades yeah let’s have a let’s have a Ganda and see what we can do ooh protection 4 that’s actually a good one in all of that I’ve got one good trade do I even need protection four no but I guess it’s good

To have the future I guess now we have to sort of mess around until we get some good trades this will be fun I’d like to officially announce my retirement from villager manipulation cuz this was the worst let me start by showing you something over here as you can see there

Is two llama boys in the water over here there was a Wandering Trader with it and unfortunately this very intelligent wandering Trader decides to go underneath the house and drown however he did give me this he gave me a little Birch Birch sapling which uh you know

Let me show you what I’ve got now I didn’t get all of them because there’s no reason to but uh this guy’s fire respect to we have an Infinity boy a fortune 3 boy a silk touch boy Power five we have a looing three boy we have

An Unbreaking three mending and Flame I didn’t do these guys cuz I didn’t need anymore there’s a sharpness five boy efficiency four protection fall BNS free and feather falling free so I have a lot of uh book trads as you you can probably tell right over here so this is actually

Really good because it means I can now take probably one two fre start with a sword looing three fire aspect sharpness that is about as good as a sword as you’ll love to see so just just in case anyone is ever thinking heyen you don’t

Have that good of a gear let me show you this sharpness five looting free mending fire as the only I can get sweeping Edge and I’m not that bothered about sweeping Edge the shovel again I can make it efficiency five I don’t care the bow I

Do have a flame book so I could probably put that on there that’s about the best pickaxe I’ve ever had the axe is pretty damn good as well protection four okay that don’t have Unbreaking free either protection four protection four protection four all mending all Unbreaking free except the Boost which

Have feather falling for this is about as good as this gear is ever going to get I could spend the rest of these 100 days working on you know putting this uh fre over here and fixing these up I have no interest in doing that uh because now

That I got the Birch sapling I actually want to see if I can add a third island at birch tree island and then maybe I’m going to see if about killing another wither because I have a beacon over here I have a beacon in the middle I’d like a

Beacon on that side of the island as well that’s my final couple of plans I’m going to build myself birch tree island and then I’m going to build myself a final Beacon uh the only question is do am I going to have enough iron to uh you

Know make a full Beacon or not I mean I don’t think I will he might be really really close oh no never mind so onto birge tree Island I go I set out a good outline grabbed some grass blocks and start filling it in I had the island

Fully made by the end of day free 183 I did also make a little bit of an access from the bridge similar to what I did for spruce tree island now this is definitely the worst tree out of all the islands but you know it’s Birch so

Anyone got a problem with that no cool I also tried to add flame to my bow but I did not have 17 levels un fortunately and so I wanted to do one last task to get myself a beacon I had two beacons on the island already already but a third

One in the other side of the island would actually be really really helpful now I did already have one school in the school Monument thing but I decided that I didn’t want to touch that that one could just be left there I’m going to go get myself free fresh school and so I

Returned to the Fortress now I didn’t really keep track of my days on here but I believe I started on day 385 and it was by day 391 I believe was when I got myself the first skull over than a mild Pigman problem that I had this was pretty

Standard Wither Skeleton murder Shuckle and by by the time I gra back I grabbed all the iron and just started digging out the Beacon I had all the blocks in by day 392 just need to cover it with a little bit of sand and after slowly making my

Way down to the Deep slate cave it was day 394 I mean I’ve done this twice already so I mean what could possibly go wrong uh feel like it’s time we do what we do at the end of all these 100 day shitel let’s do a I haven’t done the map

Scratch that scratch that let me do the map all right take two and uh I’m not going to lie I’ve made a mistake so what I’ve done is when I realized that I wanted to get the maps I accidentally grabbed the maps up here in 200 because

I never knocked them in you’ll see that there’s stuff there in 200 that shouldn’t be there like the ne portal and the house of loveless that kind of thing really really kind of upset by that but I guess there’s not really much I could do about it now I did look there

Is no way to rever the maps back H they are just there now I realized I also made a mistake with this thing cuz you could uh you kind of see this you see this little little guy do you remember that little skip that I took like on it

Was like the 50-day bark uh yeah it’s it’s there now obviously I can’t go over there and show you exactly what it is but I can show you right on the 400 Day map I uh I had a little bit of a goof so I hope the payoff was worth it but here

Here’s the 400 Day map board in its entirety um let’s see we have added birge tree island which is still growing there is the new house for the villagers there’s the head for Stevie boy the new NE portal honestly there was a two that added for build oh of course the giant

Thing let’s let’s go to a bit of a tour let’s start with the village Trader Hall pretty satisfied with it I must say I do have a couple of villages spare if I ever need any over enchantment but to be honest with you looking at this maybe sweeping Edge that’s about it that’s

Pretty much all that I’ll need Spruce Island still looks like Cherry Tree Blossom still looks like I still don’t know how that block got up there cuz that block was not there originally I don’t know uh here’s birge tree island I personally like that it looks terrible

Because it’s birge tree wood and there probably with someone in the common being Haven but bir Tre is the best obviously we made the changes to our house which uh it wasn’t much of a change but I kind of like it I think the house now looks better all of this is

The same now I’m not going to go up there I’m really really not cuz it just it does genuinely take a good four minutes to get up there roughly but just know that it’s very funny that I spent all the time building this watching tutorials faffing around actually trying

To you know get this to get a trident and then tried within 30 seconds of me actually trying to get one from it which is just it just sums it up perfectly it just sums up my I want to say my look cuz that would make it sound like I’m

Unlucky here but uh actually think it’s very funny very very funny that of course I get one basically instantly the cactus farm again I could probably make it much more efficient but I just I don’t really need any cacti that much so this is a short thing that it doesn’t

Really matter I mean they can get stuck there it doesn’t matter it I got Cactus that’s all that really matters there and the other two things I build well firstly there’s this which is just it’s supposed to make the nether portal look you know more than just a nether portal

It’s not that great but I I like it I like what what it’s supposed to be I guess I could maybe have like a little lava pool around here or something make it look better and then the Steve house Witcher now I can’t unfortunately the best thing to use is probably like clay

Or stained clay and I could technically do that but I don’t know I kind you know what it’s supposed to be just a very poor edition of Steve uh and this is where I spent most of my time in this world getting you guys already had you

Too but uh this is the first ever time I’ve got a piglin head in fact it’s probably the first ever time I’ve collected all the skulls in Minecraft so you know I quite like it I quite like it it’s it’s basic it’s it’s not meant to

Be much but for what it is I quite like it and uh well if they ever add more schulls then I’ll have to fap around trying to make more space maybe I can make a second layer or something but um yeah you know what I’m pretty happy with

It and if I’m correct that is everything uh I even left my armor in here which is adorable uh this 100 days oh yeah there’s also the paths which I made look better the only thing I didn’t touch is this but I honestly don’t want to touch

This this is supposed to be the basic thing that it is and I quite like it oh there’s also the beacon which is accidentally nearly covered by the trees might have to change that in a little bit but we stand here on 400 Days with you know it was more about the bills

Themselves weren’t necessarily massive but they required a lot of work like getting the skulls was such a big feat making that Abomination was such a big feat the this the book trades was such a big feat that each individual thing took so long but I’m going to be honest with

You I really satisfied what I’ve got done now then the question that most of you have probably been waiting for is 500 Days going to happen when’s 500 Days going to happen and the simple answer is I want to do 500 Days you know what I

Want to do 1,000 days as I said the end of the last video if I get to 5K likes on 300 Days 5K likes on 400 Days and 5K likes on 500 days I’ll do that I I’m kind of confident no matter what the situation is I will do 500,000 just give

Me a minute because literally last video people like the video was out for 2 hours people like okay where’s 400 Days guys I can’t play 100 days of Minecraft in 2 minutes it takes over 20 hours for this I appreciate the support but give give me a chance please but yeah I think

That’s about everything maybe maybe give me some ideas on what I could build maybe maybe cuz going to be honest with you I feel like I’ve done everything that I wanted to do that looks really good by the way that looks really really good right then I will see you on Day

400 cuz we have a uh we have a tradition for 400 yeah Day 400 we did it that being said going to the pep W did somebody say 500 Days Hello everybody welcome back to the survival island series you know who I am first of all why you

Starting on day five why why you starting on this video go go go watch the 100 first oh I’ll put a link at the top right oh well I can’t really I’ll put a link at the top right so you can watch the full series but if you don’t

Want to do that I’m Haven and nice to meet you pleasure this is day 401 on the an island that I have spent well 401 days on as always I need to grab this bad boy because I may have forgot to do that now then ladies and gentlemen we

Have things to do now for 400 Days there’s a lot that I wanted to do before I even started I actually basically made a list of things that I want to do from making new islands with Cherrywood and alacia trees to quotquot fixing the mob sport which will’ll get to a little bit

Later but to talk about the new things that are available do I even do I do I even need to intr him do I even need to say what’s going on take it away Dr havenhand well well well can’t get enough of us can you well you know why

I’m here let’s do some explaining the better looking Haven came up with quite a few plans for this video so let’s quickly list them off firstly the mob spawner I’ll let live Haven go into more detail but I’ve been getting a lot of comments about it and I’ll tackle that

First things first however that’s nothing compared to the big task that I’m looking at doing firstly there is a brand new trimming in the game that I’m able to get so I’m going to be wanting that to the trimming house when I I’m able to get the triming I was also able

To convince better looking Haven that I actually need a you know house for my lessons so he’s going to build one of those at some point be much better than this flat W that I’m currently doing it in I also have a zulia and a casa tree

So I want to build a new island to them similar to the cherry tree island or the birst tree island so that will be on the cards as well the egg statue at the moment looks kind of blun so I actually found a cool design that I wanted to

Recreate in my world to make it look more fancy I want to make a somewhat boat design as well maybe with a little bit of a dog just put onto the island I mean I’ve got to leave the island at some point and and then finally bees can

I get them is it possible I mean I’ll need to investigate a little bit but that’s pretty much every goal that I wanted to get on to now that pesky mob grinder the first thing I’m going to do is I’m I’m I’m still against the comments because I have received many

Comments saying that this is broken and it’s my fault I don’t believe any of you but as I final let me prove it I’m going to go ahead and listen to your comments now my claim about this mob spawner if you forgot from last time is that it’s

Not working because there is too many caves underneath it and that’s the reason why it’s not working however everybody is now claiming that the reason this is not working is because the slabs on top these slabs right here are still technically l in life which to be fair they kind of are but

Missed that was worth it so what we’re going to do is we’re going to remove every one of these slabs every one of them and we’re going to basically replace it with cob and then we’ll know for sure we’ll know 100% for sure who is

Right this is it I this is the last time I don’t even need this anymore but I just want to be right about this and if I’m wrong about this then I owe so many people an apology I willing to bet it all that I’m right I’m willing anyway

Let’s bring it down and so I took off the roof it did take longer than I expected so now that we’ve taken it all down before I continue and get this finished before the day ends I need a ruling ladies and gentlemen these are in

A scenario where I I feel like I need to talk about something and I need to know whether what I’m about to say is okay or not you my loyal viewer I I I need your guys’ opinion on something the survival Island Challenge is pretty straightforward I’m not allowed to leave

The island like in the Overworld above the ground is the general ruling never is fine and caving is fine and use of the end is fine if you can get there without going to the cave if we ignore the one time I ran to the stronghold available which very much a regret of

Mine so in theory I have technically broken that rule by doing the stronghold one but if we ignore that I’ve never broken my own set of rules of leaving the Overworld Island however there is a ruling that I would like to ask you the viewer I’m obviously keeping on my

Island as you know but am I allowed to search the ocean so if I don’t go to other land would I be allowed to search the ocean and the reason I asked that is because there is now new things in Wonder 20 suspicious sand suspicious gravel in in oceans this world has

Obviously not been explored very much and the the general area around spawn is mainly ocean so I’m hoping I’d be able to get some of the new armor trims maybe a sniff egg something like that now obviously I’m not going to do it in this video because well people aren’t here

And I don’t want to just do it without asking so in the comment below I’m going to leave a pin comment and I would like you to reply to that comment just you know give me your opinion am I allowed to leave the island if I only search the

Ocean let me let me know what you guys think makeing an argument for way people think I shouldn’t even be able to search the ocean I’m 100% okay with that but yeah that’s that’s kind of where I am all right then it’s now all Cobble so

Tomorrow we can go back to this and actually have a Ganda ah all right then this this is H this is it ladies and gentlemen hav on versus the comment section I’m going to just hear out these guys so we obviously know for sure that they weren’t there I’m going to wait

Here for 5 minutes and we’re going to see how much spawns let’s do this and 5 minutes later I have gained a grand total of two zombies ladies and gentlemen as I have been saying for the last two videos the reason this is not working is because all the caves

Underneath it is spawning mob I I I appreciate you guys trying to call like say when I’m doing something wrong I really do is not Haven on versus the the comment section the reason this is not working is not because of Any slab issue or anything like that it’s just because

There’s too much areas in this world to spawn un unfortunately that’s not going to work I still you know I I’m really happy that I tried it though cuz if I was wrong it would have been cool to have but unfortunately this is just not going to work cuz there’s just too many

Areas around for it to SP unfortunately anyway I’m glad we got that one sort of that’s the first one ticked off the board let’s uh let’s move on to something else before I get on to any of the main tasks that I spoke about in the intro there’s one thing I really wanted

To do and that was to fix Ste somebody suggested that if I use stripped oak logs instead of strip Spruce looks then he would actually look more like Steve so I was going to do that I have to say after getting it completed it was definitely a good fit here’s the

Completed Vision on day 43 I have to say it looks so much better and now it’s time for a new build I haven’t actually made a build out of oak logs yet so I’m going to go ahead and get a bunch of oak logs once I had enough by day 404 it was

Just about finding a good spot and this one I am going to need some space for I ended up making this build quite big I was actually focusing on the floor pattern at first cuz that’s just something I never really do with my build it took me all day but I have to

Say I quite like the floor I think it looks good next up on day 405 it was the back and the front walls I’m not going to lie I was just completely winging it but I’m hopeful towards the end it will look all right I also got the entrances

Sort of this day and after getting even more logs on day 46 I started working on the roof logs were expensive but I think they were going to really complete the build when it was completed for 407 update I just added some glass in in my opinion this build was finally coming

Together do you know what it is yet you will in a second 4 away I was mainly focused on finishing the roof I got some Spruce stairs in it I would like to say that the roof is now complete and the final touches on day 409 were very

Simple and well it was done I just got to work on a bit of interior design I am going to need quite a few bookshelves for what I wanted to do here so thank God villager trades are thing and about three or four days later Jo we should we

Do a little bit of a tour of Dr Haven’s new office so here we are looking at it from the front I think it’s very different everything I’ve built I can’t decide if I like it or not so you’ll have to give me your honest opinion in the comments section the exterior is

Pretty pretty basic but I’m perfectly fine with that interior where the work has been done you got the bookshelves that I I thought they looked really cool up here makes it look like you have to like go up and actually try to get them had a couple things like a flower pot

Here with the only clay that I’ve ever got in this world I don’t remember how I got it these little cauldrons with bushes I thought looked cool have a little area here for Dr Haven to do his study of course here is his little Podium right here and then there’s

Obviously this now if you if you look in you obviously can tell very clearly something’s kind of wrong about this now unfortunately in the main design when I already did the dror Haven on bit I use black concrete and I don’t think it’s possible for me to get black Concrete in

This world at least not easily so I did my best hopefully this won’t look too bad but we shall see oh it looks fine it looks great actually uh even the design I quite like it but there we go ladies and gentlemen I’d like to officially

Introduce the new area for Dr Haven and to do his standing it no longer has to sit around in that flat world and we can sit right here right there and watch Dr Haven and talk about his schnitzel it’s not the best build I’ve ever done on

This thing but it’s a new build for the server this world really coming together in the future from now on whenever there’s a docky Haven and bit he’s going to be right in there what was that right here anyway on to the next task and with

That done it was time to finally fix up the end egg statue so I got myself to work I found a really cool design of a slain Dragon so on day 4113 I got to work there is a problem however for the Statue to be completed I need another

Dragon head not just the End by the way not just the outer end I I got to go find an end I got to find a brand new end City oh boy good thing I still have this elytra and I’m able to make plenty of fireworks and with the power of

Mending and Unbreaking I was off into the end I go day 4:14 and it took me no time at all I got the Ed rods and the dragon school and I was already off home the same day also check this out I could not do this fly in a 100 more attempts

So I think I think I’m just a pro game I think that’s the only only facts of the day by the time I got back on day 450 I wasn’t actually fully done I needed to quickly run into the game and found a long forgotten geode from the past cuz I

Needed some Crystal then I also need a candle which needs to be black luckily I have some black D from some squids that I’ve killed and though I originally planned to make it much much bigger I do have to say I like the look of the slain

Dragon it came together quite well it’s not perfect but don’t worry I fixed it a little later Dr Haven on here and my God look at these sweet dicks didn’t even have to pay Haven that much to build there anyway onto the biggest task of the whole video Minecraft has added five

New trimmings now in case you don’t know between the five new triming all are hidden in trial ruins or suspicious sand or suspicious gravel areas of which I have basically no access to looking for me there is a fifth trimming in the area called a silence template which of

Course I am able to get now these new silence templates can be found in ancient cities which means I am going to need to find myself a new ancient city and after finding the anient city I’m going to have to help that one spawn checking the spawn rate and it’s only

1.25% chance oh boy that’s going to take him minute so the goal is simple we first have to find a new new Asian City and then hope for the almost one in a 100 chance of it being in there fortunately because I’ve been everywhere

Around my base I am going to need a new plan and I did have a bit of a wild one but it is going to require some obsidian after grabbing some and popping back into the never my plan was to go very far away from my original portal pople

Back in the Overworld in completely terrain and then basically dig in a random Direction help for the best the only thing that’s worth mentioning during the flight in the ne was that those two bastions like basically next to each other so that was cool anyway after getting what I thought was far

Enough away I made my portal at Bed rock that way the portal in the Overworld would spawn underground as well which meaning I didn’t break any rules in leaving my island in the Overworld because of how far away I am now this is all completely new terrain now it’s just

About digging in a random Direction and hoping for the best day 417 is pretty much going to subm of my life for a little bit it was just digging yeah this is going to be fun I did box a little clever on day 418 raising my wi to the

Point where I was aiming to get as much coal as possible since I stupidly didn’t bring any when I originally came the coal was definitely Bountiful but you know what wasn’t bful ended up killing two zombies one of them dropped a carrot and the other dropped a potato but

Because my sword has fire aspect on it it dropped a baked potato so 419 days in and I still yet to get a potato and this is the first time that a zombie has dropped a potato but like I say cuz of the fire aspect it’s a baked potato then

My quest potatoes carries on and it was back to digging on day four 19 making sure all the XP dropping ORS happen so my mening pickaxe doesn’t get anywhere near as low as it should unless a man may make a joke about making it to day 420 I’m more focused on fighting the

Deep dark biome for the first time let’s get look at around fairly confident a day pass during this time so we’ll call this day 421 but I found it now we just got to get looking so in order I found a swift sneak free book great diamond

Leggings a golden apple chore some disc fragments more Frank blets I had templates but it was the wrong one an Infinity book which I didn’t take and after searching for what was probably 10 minutes I could fairly confidently say that there is no new template in this

Area which means I have to find a new new new ancient city isn’t that just lovely I back to my portal on day 422 and then started digging the other way the creeper was a little bit unnecessary I walk Al lonely road the road that I will walk cuz I’m alone that’s not

Lyrics day 424 Dr to Haven and is here Haven stopped recording I’m just here to fill the Gap look at my sweet digs oh yeah he apologizes for skipping days but to be fair I did dig like 4 days and nobody wants to watch that anyway it was

Day 428 and I was back to recording and I had found myself another ancient city let’s sneak in and on the second Chest oh my God yes oh my God thank you now let’s just leave safely I said safe F I got back to the portal by day 430 and one quick fly later we are home you guys just love the stuff it was really easy to dup them as well now we just

Need a full set of never right armor so it was day 431 where I got myself back to never right mining again good news is I only need 14 pieces of aent debris cuz I already have two scraps back at base and had a very successful day one of

Maning because I got five pieces debris on the first day I got myself two more on day 432 I got myself three more on day 433 and you guessed it on day 434 I got three more getting me to the 14 pieces I needed let’s head home 435 and

I was cooking away got myself three neite ingots feels cursed better make a for just to be safe and I can’t believe how little lapis I have it’s actually kind of crazy now the only options for the trims available to me was actually iron or copper Nava one was amazing but

I decided to settle with iron and now I could put the house in the trimming area and it may have taken 20 days but it was done I can now take a break from digging we are done with trimmings for now day 436 and it was now time to work on the

New islands first things first I need dirt of which I have zero off well the good news is I can finally take down the giant occasion that’s just been sat there for ages and then he was into the caves to grab dirt of all things dirt digging yeah yeah yeah yeah dirt digging

Yeah yeah yeah so yeah I think I have enough dirt by day 437 what do you guys think and so I started building the islands on day 438 I’ve done this quite a few times at this point so was pretty much just following the same script that

I’ve already done before day 439 I had the first Outlet done on the first island day 440 the next thing up was the bridge I just need a little Hill over here little stream right there and dunzo once the trees grow in here this will be

Great and on day 441 it was time for a xier island okay I literally am just doing a copy and paste from the previous let’s here we are on day 443 and she is done I just need a little bit of bone meal going to add some sugar cane and

Again once we let this all grow out it will look great now somebody did suggest something about bees as well in the comment section in the last video and I thought that maybe it’s something I could go for sadly I wasn’t too familiar in how to get beehive Sport and tree so

I was honestly just faffing around here a little bit day 4 144 came and honestly I was just looking around a little bit on some extra stuff to do apart from the bees and the boats I had completed everything that I set out at this start

Of this video and to be honest with you those two tasks was not going to take 50 days to complete and so after having a quick look around the only thing I really looked at and thought I could do some work on that is the melon farm

Because let’s be honest that looks kind of basic but first on day 445 let’s attempt a trial and error of birch tree growing now from what I learned is that if you have flowers around the birch tree there is a 5% chance that a beehive

Will grow on it’s a low chance but we’ll give it a go a full day later of trying this and sadly I got no success so instead on day 446 I’m going to set myself up an auto M bomb so let’s gather all the material we need and get moving

Day 447 and this melon farm has been with me since the first what 20 days so this is a this is sad days you did salute for the melon boys salute for the melon all right let’s get moving it was pretty simple case of following a tutorial online to find a useful melon

Farm and once I got the rails down it was time for me to do a little bit of a test run it worked great day 449 and I got the roof on there now was just a case of placing the Pistons which was not fun it it was actually kind of a

Pain to do I’m not going to lie and then on day 490 I had to take off the ENT entire roof I don’t know why the tutorial told me to put on a roof just to take it off but there you go because now I need to put observers in and with

That done this melon farm should fully work day 451 I grew the melon stems with some bone meal I watched the melons grow and it was not working wonder why I quickly learned my mistake and spoiler alert it was a very annoying one basically I accidentally put the rails one block too

Low which means I’m going to have to remove all the rails raise it all up one block and then put it back down and that’s sounds terrible lucky for me though I’m just a bit of a wher so it actually wasn’t too bad to get all in

And after fixing it up and watching it again there was success one day I will make this prettier but for now it is a fully functioning Auto melon farm which is fantastic and then on day 4502 well as I already said I wanted myself a boat

And a dock so I’m going to go ahead and start on the boat and I have to leave the island one day and as as well make a boat to do it so I started yet again grabbing the materials from my story track day 453 and I decided to build it

Over here yeah next to the ne portal you know good spot really all right then let’s build a Boat Well it took three or 4 days here is my little boat quite like it simple it’s basic I feel like I could probably P something on top of that to really add to the roof book here but other than that it’s it’s quite good the only two

Things I really want to add to like proper make it complete firstly the the design actually has an armor stand here I would like to put an armor stand there overall I quite like it it’s basic but I mean I’m not even going to try and build

A big complex that’s the first with the armor the second thing is I need to build a dock to it so that’s kind of the next two things I’m going to do so after getting my armor stand in cleaning my gobbin I started cutting down Birch

Hoping to give the beehives another go I also needed a bunch of spruce wood so I started chopping down some Spruce trees as well it was honestly just a bit of a waiting game this day for whilst I’m waiting for the trees to regrow whilst I

Was waiting I I did actually have a quick look around and look at the tiny little island over there it’ be a really cute spot for something in the future I don’t know what but I just think it’d be cool for something I was pretty confident that I had enough wood in by

Day 458 so I began building the dock which I instantly began deconstructing cuz I made it way too big I don’t know what I was planning here as I was building on day 459 and would you look at that a wondering Trader these are useless and with the dock completed a

Basic dog I still like it for what it is let’s get the armor stand in I made a black cap for the p Pirates cap you know how Pirates have a black cap and then I made red armor because I just thought the red look cool but we are officially

Done sort of I did have the plan to make a second smaller ship in the future somewhere on here but uh for now we’ll come back to that later on day 460 I gave one last attempt in trying to get some bees and then I’m moving on to

Another project and I can pretty confidently and sadly say this isn’t going to happen but it was worth a try melon farm working great by the way but the bees that’s just not happening day 461 and and out of the 10 tasks that I have completed I did actually think of

Another one that I wanted to do but for that I am going to need some clay looking for me I found about 100 Lush capes in my time so this should be a problem getting some clay I think I got myself enough you may be asking me on

Day 462 why do I need so much clay and the answer is really simple I want terra cotta my plan is to finally upgrade the pigstep area from just well four Nevers and a couple of bamboo planks actually going to make something good and after looking online I found that if I was

Able to get three colors orange red and yellow which are all obtainable for me I can make some pretty cool pixel art of the pigstep disc just need the bow meal 18,000 times get myself a bunch of yellow dye and we will be good to go

After a lot of crafting on day 463 I had everything needed and let’s get to work starting with the outline did a little bit of inner design and it was done it’s a little brighter than I was hoping for but to be honest with you it’s fine you

Can definitely tell what it is there’s only one way to celebrate our life on day 463 but D is a big step woo day 464 and the farm still isn’t working by the way just before I mention it so um now what as silly as it sounds the plans

That I made at the start of the video were all very quickly completed and I still have 35 days to go with nothing planned to do so for the time being I was just aimlessly wanding around the island looking for something to do but there is very simple solution hit me on

Day 4005 this is my island of course but there’s no me there’s there’s not me or anything so uh I need me if if you know what I mean so I’m going to recreate my Minecraft skin on the island but to do that I need wool and a decent amount of

There so let’s make some shephered villagers which I always knew you could trade Wool with and I need to get myself a white wool trade I am out of villages though so I am going to need to breed like crazy and then on day 466 I

Honestly went AFK I hate to do it but I need the villages there’s nothing else for me to do so sorry about that but I guess we’re waiting around and wait I came back on day 468 I now had villagers the only problem is that I don’t have

The extra wool needed trade the emeralds because the wool trade back is on tier two so I need to basically upgrade the villagers from Tier 1 to tier 2 so the only option I’ve got is to keep swapping out the Villager trades until I get shears which means I’m going to have

Every Shear I ever need 470 and it took me a second but we got it the coer is completely random so the fact that it took this little time I’m honestly quite appreciative of also you may have noticed the uh the inflated prices I may have had to murder a villager or two

Togethers to work but there we got there and by day 473 I got every train needed for the main body the extra details I can work on later but for now let’s get to work building our body I started with working on the front first getting up to

The top of my body day 474 the next thing I worked on was the arms which admittedly wasn’t too bad the face was definitely going to be a bit of a pain though but on day 475 once I had the face completed I decided to leave the whole head which immedately again wasn’t

Too bad I mean I don’t have a mouth or or a mustache or my goggles but we we’ll do that later for now let’s finish off the body I got the feet done the legs done and the body done mine is the chicken on the back of course and on day

476 with the arms Dawn I nearly got killed by a Golem while checking it out which definitely would have sucked this far in anyway I finished the face off which it does look a little bit stretched when you’re looking at it but this is an exact pixel by pixel

Recreation of my skin so I guess that’s just the way it looks and uh oh hey wondering Trader Oak suppling you say go on go on then lad and here is the finished project by day four 177 yeah the colors aren’t a perfect match to my

Skin but to be 100% honest with you I quite like it I think it’s a good fit day 478 and with a new sapling well you know what that means I need a new island and so I began setting up a tiny little island for the oak sapling with plenty

Of puppies cuz you know the Beehive D is still there and here is the completed Island on day 480 it’s simple but good just had to build a little bit of a bridge over which is also connected to the elas tree it’s a very simple bridge design lanterns of course now we just

Need to get some saplings so so I cut down the tree and got one in return so uh yeah I think I’ll leave that for now I hear what you’re saying on day 481 wow Haven that’s that’s a lot of melons what are you going to do with all those

Melons the answer is simple my dear viewer I’m going to build a melon Castle which of course requires a lot of Melon now I know the some of you going what are you talking about but I’m going to make a castle and a how you not following along though I was fairly

Confident I wasn’t going to be able to complete it this video and as always for the next one I got as much done as I could like this most of the flooring is done but unfor Al for me yeah I’m going to need a lot more I also got really

Look on day 482 was one thing I did notice in the Villager area is that there was a black cat and that is something I’ve never seen before after taming him which was admittedly a real pain in the membrane I got him in my house I was actually thinking if I would

Be able to get every type of cat here but that’s something I’ll have to look for in the future as well day 483 and I did something that some of you may find cheating and I hope not and that is I flew around the local area just to have

A look around the water that’s around me I just really wanted to see what was there there wasn’t much like a tiny little island over here but there was this ocean ruin over here that did have suspicious s i could very easily brush it apart and open it up if I wanted to

But again I want to know if that’s okay let me know in the comment section below oh yeah and here’s the Among Us in the water that I’ve built earlier in the last 100 days G 484 and I remember something that I wanted to do for a very

Long time and that was at stairs to my mine area it make it so much easier getting up and down I even found a new cave because the main staircase really just led into a water cave and though it’s not much at the moment I hope fix

That up a little bit later as well and yeah I think it looks quite good day 485 I’d like to make it clear that I’m still getting attacked by Iron Golems by the way not really sure why and then I had an idea to add any missing enchantment

To any of the armor that I had so after buying fre mending books I started combining I only had two more books to combine but that would does require me to get an extra 15 levels to do it so I went back into NE to grind some levels

Day 488 I didn’t even realize that I got a 12 levels I was still going but mly not for long I still knew what was going on and day 490 it was done get to sneak around really quickly the last thing for me to do was to get the maps done I did

Also get a nausea shell I don’t know actually pronounce it but a shell from a drown so I don’t know if that’s useful at all but maybe I get a bunch I can make a conduit or something I don’t know I would have finished quicker but these stupid Iron Golem won’t stop attacking

Me my God and on day 490 it was done and the absolute last thing I did on day 494 was I spent a few days collecting melons and I was able to get the floor in one day this will be a beautiful melon castle for now it’s just a

Beautiful melon floor anyway on to the last couple of days day 498 and I think we can all agree that we’re done here Island Tour anybody Let’s do an Island Tour first of all uh let’s introduce our black cat friend I actually googled this uh they can only

Spawn in villages during night during like perfect Moon so I guess it spawned the night before and I just spotted it in there so very lucky at least that’s my understanding of it I could be wrong soone can correct me in the comments if

They’d like to uh oh God there is a lot to to get to so let’s start on uh this side of the island as we normally do starting off with our little Steve boy we’ve finally fixed him so he actually looks more like Steve uh definitely looks better and the little dock over

Here is quite nice leading onto this tiny little boat I think I will add a boat here at some point to make it more of like a a dock area ship area but I actually quite like this boat maybe I could do a bit better on the roof over

There but for what it is it works fantastically obviously we got this new Bad Boy The Silence trim if it was up to me I probably wouldn’t have made it white but considering that I literally don’t have any other options other than white or copper and copper did not look

Good this will do oh look at the new Pig step area now we have 100% more Pig step bit like the IR s run if you look at it that way but hey you know it’s it’s pretty good obviously Dr Haven’s house you would have seen him satting there a

Couple of times throughout the video and probably the next couple of videos um but it’s quite nice it’s a very simple design the floor design and everything but it’s much better than that Flatlands I must say don’t think I did really anything over here or really over here

But I did do this which is not really much but I’ll still show it the stairs that go all the way down to the bottom I’ll probably make this like a full m shaft area in a a future video but for now it’s just some stairs to the ease of

Ease of the world this is where pretty much the three big builds have come from so you got the melon farm obviously of course you got me it does look a little bit silly depending on the angle you look at but like trust me that is a

Pixel by pixel Recreation of my skin so that is technically correct just looks a bit silly the melon platform one day I will have a nice melon Castle there but for now it’s just going to have to be a platform after took this one like quite

A few times to make it look as good as possible I do think it looks better than the just it just the egg by itself which was like there and now the egg over here it actually looks like a slant Dr I don’t know I I quite like it maybe maybe

You guys can tell me if if there anything I can do to improve it but I I quite like it and then finally the last few things over here was the new islands obviously birge tree island actually has birge trees now so go bir tree island

Alasia tree island is it looks a bit like swampy and stuff which I quite like that’s not oasia that’s aulia aulia AIA aelia sorry there we go we got there in the end this is Alaia what I like about this one this was actually completely an

Accident I like that you have to go across this bridge and then it made a tiny Bridge here I wasn’t intending on putting an island here at all but I don’t even know why this Oak sa is not growing do I have bone meal I don’t yeah that’s that’s oak tree island will

Probably add some more to it disappointed about not getting bees but I I don’t know if I can based on the biome cuz it’s is all lukew motion so unfortunately that’s probably not going to be a thing and I think that’s about everything I did in 500 days I’ve done

One 100 to 500 today is 501 and I have 499 days to go to successfully you know complete the title of the video surviving 1,000 days in Hardcore Minecraft just by looking at this island you can still already see how much I’ve done there an insane amount of work

Everywhere you look there is something on this island and that’s crazy so a couple of things I want to talk about before I jump into it number one the seed oh my God here we go the seed everybody wants the seed to this Minecraft world I promise I will give it

But I don’t even know what the seed to this Minecraft world is uh I knew a long time ago when I got the world but yeah the seed I promise at the end of this video I will give you the seed to this world and you guys can make your own

Videos on this world and I’d love to see some of your videos but we’ll we’ll talk about that a little later secondly I have so many big plans this is going to be one of the most daunting tasks I’m ever doing because of how much work it’s

Going to take but I’m I’m on FL I mean 500 Days in one video is going to probably be a very very long video considering each one of them is over half an hour each 100 days per video and I’m doing five of them so if you’re

Telling me this is going to be over 2 hours so uh strap in get some snacks but yeah we have so many different things to do so many things to build or try and accomplish or everything like that you know what let’s just get right into it

Then starting on day 501 the first thing we’re going to look at is that pesky mob grinder here we go again so I don’t remember exactly which video it was maybe 200 maybe 300 days but I built this and I never was able to get it to

Work and a lot of people in the comment section have come and basically told me that I’ve made mistakes with it here all that there and I’ve done my best to follow pretty much every instruction that people have given me I used slabs which I’ve now replaced I’ve done

Everything I can it just never worked my argument is because of all the caves underneath that are unlit that’s why there there’s too many areas around for stuff to spawn everybody else seems to believe that there’s a different particular reason the last thing I keep seeing people saying to why this isn’t

Working is because in here I didn’t put trap doors down where the drop is sorry to burst your bubble people there has been trap doors in here for the past 100 days unfortunately I just forgot to show it but this has been here for the past 100 days and this thing still doesn’t

Work so I’m sorry to say people this is just not going to work it is unfortunate cuz it could have been very useful but yeah this just doesn’t work I don’t know why I just want to show people that to make sure that I’m not ignoring them I

Read all the comments I promise you I’m not trying to do it for more views as people have accused me of doing it that this just doesn’t work simply because there’s too many caves underneath that’s causing mobs to spawn that’s the reason why this isn’t working are we done with

The mob grinder now I’m officially done with the mob grinder I’ve been tempted to take it down I’m not going to lie anyway moving on and so on day 502 I created the classic Haven and to-do board I mean can’t be that classic since I haven’t made one in a while but you

Get the point it’s just a way for me to write everything down that I want to do between now and day 1000 but what are these crazy tasks that I’m wanting to do well my friends I think we need to get the experts in here to explain it to

Like I need to give him an introduction wow 1,000 days we did it peeps I’m going to get paid so when we began on day 51 I set myself nine challenges all of which will definitely take a lot of time but all of which I’m fairly confident that

I’d be able to do let’s quickly run through them firstly at the end of the 500 Days video I began working on a melon castle at this point in time I only had the platform completed since I ran out of time so I will want to finish

That by the end of this video I thought it would be cool to see how many advancements I’d be able to get between now and the end of the video as well I know I won’t be able to get all of them but as many as I can would be cool the

Villager house is definitely a little bit cramped and I really wanted to improve their bases I mean they have beening complaining enough about it so what I’m wanting to do is to basically make my own villager city of ss basically create their own Island for

Them all to live on so they no longer have to live in a what 10x 10 house yeah it might be better for them I also think it would be kind of cool if I can get a monoral kind of deal set up on the island I’m not exactly 100% sure what I

Mean by that but I’ll add it onto the two board for the time being and the final four tasks require context for the past 500 Days barring the one time I left to go to the stronghold I’ve never left the island yes I’ve technically cage and gone to New Dimensions but I’ve

Never gone more than a 100 blocks outwards from my Island on the surface in the Overworld and last time I asked you guys if it would be okay for me to search the oceans of this world to clarify I wouldn’t be allowed to search any lands but any body of waters would

Be okay and the best way I could say the response to that question was well for every one person that said I shouldn’t be able to do that there was at least aund more saying that it would be fine so if you have a problem with this

Rolling then you can blame the comments of the last video but from this point onwards I I’m allowed to leave the island to search Oceans but only oceans I’m not allowed to enter any other piece of land any other structure or anything like that it’s just the water and what’s

Inside the water I imagine flying over the lands with an alter is okay on the condition that I don’t actually step on the lands itself at least that’s how I was able to find more Oceans by flying over them and with this new rule in it

Does give me some new options firstly I want to get myself a sniffer egg I can’t really get a camel so I’ll have to settle with the new Mob of the survival island series being the sniffer and after that I want to see if it’s possible for me to get the brand new

Seven Pottery shards I want all of them and I didn’t think that one would be too hard and finally the last two tasks though I will go into more details a little bit later I should be able to get two more trimmings now that I can search

The ocean meaning my Pink House of loveliness may need to be tweaked a little to fit them all in but that is the nine task that I am wanting to get done pretty simple really it will just take me a lot of time to do all right

Let’s get on I began day 503 by making as many fireworks as possible before heading out into the world the those who didn’t see the 500 Day video I did actually find myself a ruins towards the end of that video so I’m going to go and

See if I can find that again I also found myself a shipwreck Weare well that was easy also it may have taken 503 days but I got potatoes that is crazy anyway I have to check in the ruins I’m going to be honest with you there wasn’t

Really anything here but I did get my first Shard so that was a good start after searching around more on day 54 I found myself an ocean Monument I decided not to check it out just yet I might want to get water breathing potions for that one and hey there’s literally a W

Right over here as well that’s pretty cool I did also find two ruins over here but neither of them had suspicious sand that made me think that this area would have been pre-loaded from I assume some caving trips and so I decided to head further out to see if I could buy myself

Some fresh ruins I really don’t need this flesh oh no my sword on day 505 I was able to find myself a new ruin and this one did actually have some suspicious sand in it I was able to get myself two more Pottery shards you never

Know it could have been more but I did accidentally break a couple of suspicious gravels like a smart person would and then on on day 56 I decided it was time for me to quickly return home I put away the stuff that I had found so far trying to remember when my brewing

Stand was did take me a second but I did end up finding it I grabbed the necessary stuff that I needed and then I started Brewing away took myself a nap at the same time sure why not and on day 57 with the potions brewed off we go

When I did get to the monument well I mean I’m pretty sure everybody knows what happens here we Mur ourselves some Elder Guardians weirdly enough I found some suspicious sand here now I’m fairly confident that Monument can’t spawn suspicious sand I think what happened was a ruin spawn inside of the ocean

Monument which I thought was kind of cool could be wrong though also let me point out that despite the fact that I am full neite armor with protection four and everything these Elder Guardians they do damage anyway free Elder Guardians later and sadly there was no

Trim hey at least there was that second Monument over there three more Elder Guardians and still no trim I was still exploring the oceans on day 508 I did get myself a new pot Shard from this ruin over here also quick side now I have very recently been informed that

They’re called hot shirts H but I think we can all agree that that sounds really dumb and I’m not going back through literal pages of script just to change the word Shard to shirt so you get over it and searching more runes on day 509

Not only did I get myself a couple more shards but I was able to get a sniff egg smells interesting why why are you smelling it I also got myself a new Shard wait never mind I already had this one I did get myself a second sniff rer

Which I’m pretty sure is quite rare to find two in the same ruin but hey we move on for the time being I was done searching ruins so I decided to head back home it is also worth noting that I did pass an outpost in a jungle temple

Along the way but as agreed I’m not allowed to search then I I ain’t a rule breaker even though it is very very tempting oh hey I’m home look at that on day 510 I counted the partt shards that I had I had six and there is seven so of

Course I am one short anyway I duplicated the trims I just need some diamonds for some diamond armor though I did spend a couple of minutes looking inside the trimming house to see if I could find a good location to put the new trims in After figuring that out I

Decided that mining diamonds wasn’t really something I was wanting to do at this point so let’s just trade for the diamond armor instead I was able to upgrade a armor villager that was able to give me full diamond armor but I didn’t have enough emeralds to complete

The trades needed luckily I made a second armor that trades iron and I have all the iron in the world so this should be pretty easy at least I believe so on 511 here let me just quickly run over to the iron farm and oh oh so I do should

Have done this ages ago for the record a couple of trays later and the helmet was done a few more trades and we are completely done now I just need to go and get myself some neite armor and so it was time to go into The Nether once I

Saw out my food it’s been a while since I triggered the semi-auto Farm on day 512 into the never we went to pick ourselves up some ancient braid now I need to get myself the equivalent of two full sets of armor so that means I need four ingots here’s a couple of

Highlights of me just mining some ancient debris I’m going to be honest with you it took a little longer than expected but we was able to be completed by day 519 I got back home and start started cooking on day 520 I grabbed myself some gold made myself the ingots

Went AFK sure and 20 minutes later on day 521 I came to the realization that I don’t have any upgrades and so I’ll need at least 28 more diamonds to complete this task you know it’s it’s annoying but I’ll be honest with you I prefer being forced to do this than just being

Able to do it naturally I feel like it just adds more to the game to be fair it wasn’t too bad I mean the first vein of diamonds thanks to the fortune gave me 11 diamonds so I was basically halfway done there and it was only the next day

On day 522 where I found myself another vein that got me 20 diamonds and the final vein got me a grand total of 38 diamonds so uh yeah definitely enough when I got back on day 523 I only had lapis as a trim color unless I changed

Up one of the armor sets and actually add a never right trim which I decided to do after a little bit of fappering around which included me swapping where exactly the armor trims were I was done with the armor trains I can say theoretically I have got every single

Armor train that I can get without being able to search the on which you know is definitely an impressive feat but in case you don’t believe me let’s quickly check in the expert so as of right now I have the N City Trim both Asian City Trims the ocean Monument trim the never

Fortress trim the Shipwreck trim the stronghold trim and I am wearing the basan trim that is eight out of the possible 16 trimmings you can get in Minecraft the other eight that you can get in the game all require land access one of them you can get from a desert

Temple a Pillager Outpost a wooden man a jungle temple and the other four can be found in suspicious gravel which was the main reason I actually asked to Surge the ocean but these particular suspicious gravel can only spawn in trial ruins which yet again require land

So I still think I’ve done an impressive job to get eight full trimmings and basically all of them fall never rid so uh yeah we’ll just have to settle with 50% here I realized that 500 plus stays in on 524 and I still get a lot of enjoyment by just replanting the crop

The semi-auto farm and midle is in Gray I’ve made much better versions in newer videos but I still like it as a first attempt after that I was just wandering around I’m not really sure what I was doing I did have a good look at the 500

Day map which uh yeah definitely looks good on day 525 after making a couple of adjustments to the to-do board I started looking at advancements what I would be able to do and what I wouldn’t be able to do the one that caught my eye was the

Rare trimmings one I was so close to being able to get all of them but unfortunately I’m not able to get vexo wayfinder so unfortunately can’t do that one I was actually surprised with how many I should be able to get here like eating every food most of them could be

Done if you ignore the actual animal foods that you need to get in FY I should now be able to get every cat as long as they spawn at the Village the one I did noce the pottery one I remember that I need to actually make

The pottery St At Last I am missing one though and after having a quick look around I found out that I am missing the Plenty Shard which can be found in cold ocean ruins and so I quickly grabbed my fireworks again and remembered to bed this time and headed out into the world

On day 526th I found myself a brand new cold ocean ruins I forgot to bring the brush 527 and it feels like I was just here huh anyway let me uh let me go ahead and make a couple more fireworks before heading out again I finally new

New ruins on day 528 and had to deal with a little bit of a drowned infestation nothing too bad though but on my second suspicious gravel I got myself the Plenty Shard let’s head home it’s always funny that the first thing I see when I fly back every single time is

The Among Us thing I don’t don’t know why day 529 and I decided to make the straight away not like it matters at all but I put all the cold Pottery shards together and all the warm Pottery shards together it makes no difference whatsoever but to me that’s very

Satisfying I also will never forgive the man that decided that only making seven Pottery shards rather than eight was a good idea like seriously now where am I going to put these bleeders H I don’t know ends up deciding on the boat because sure why not and we can finally

Clear up the board next up let’s make sniffer Island and so on day 5:30 let’s get to work it’s crazy how good Swift sneak is like it makes this so much easier I am literally flying around I’ve done this a few times now so it was pretty easy enough to just basically

Remake it I also have the perfect amount of dirt needed to fill in the island that I made which was completely accidental by in the day I had the top and the sides of the island completed nice anyway I connected the bridge to King Pedra Island don’t worry

He said it was cool and with the bridge done and the grass in I of course added some lanterns and the sniffer XS were down and before any of you say it I am fully aware that they hatch faster on Hay Bales I just don’t care not like I’m

In a rush to do you know anything I also remembered on day 532 that I have oak tree island and well I was wanting to get bees at some point so I want to have a quick look to see if I could get them oh wow I picked up an apple I’m

Literally getting PTSD from just holding this thing well I have replanted the trees hoping to get myself some Buzzy Bees yeah that round I decided that whilst I’m waiting for the sniff EGS to hatch I’m going to unclock some of the Auto Farms let’s start with the iron

Farms just so much iron it’s kind of crazy and also look at how much bamboo I’ve got also a decent amount of melons I must say you know when I realized on day 533 in any normal video I would be about 33% done in this case I’m closer

To about 6% Dawn SE isn’t that nice and now we wash the sniffer eggs I wanted to actually get myself all each of them hatching and he did take most the day but boy one was able to hatch and straight after boy two on day 500 34 I

Decided let’s take off some of those advancements I F at the start you know what would be really easy to do Bullseye it will only take me a couple of seconds you know just get the bullseye and then it we’ll be good to go at least that’s

What I thought and then after many many many many shots later I didn’t get it of course I didn’t and after spending about 2 seconds trying to get it on day 535 I decided to give up and do something else how about we try and get the advancement caves and Cliff if you

Don’t know basically you have to land in a water source from the sky limit but that water source has to be at the lowest point in Bedrock so it was a simple case of digging all the way down to bedrock and then I got to fly up all

The way to the top and then I started building up to the top but unfortunately for me I ran out of block so I had to fly all the way back down and then I went to go and grab some blocks before flying all the way back up and then I

Got all the way to the sky before I dropped down the land of the Walker and get myself the advancement caves and cliffs it’s really easy enough so I uh made a mistake on day 500 6 I wanted to go check if any beeh heis had spawned

The simple answer was no but I was hearing a skeleton below me and uh while the footage speaks for itself it was not my brightest moment had to quickly fix that I also decided to go and get the advancement you need a me that does require me to

Respawn the dragon and so it was back to the never and back to the end I mean it was really simple stuff I got the advancment pretty much straight away away and I dealt with the dragon with ease the only real advantage of killing the dragon again was using the XP I was

Able to fix out all my gear so um hey that’s good right then what’s next um snipers duel hey that’s pretty simple and the best part was that there was a skeleton in the mob grinder so I just quickly opened it up got enough blocks

Away and a couple of shots later it was done for the first time of the series The Mob Grinder has actually been useful all right then Bullseye time it is round three I am 3 n down all right I really didn’t want to do this on day 538 but

There is actually a way to rig the bullseye advancement which is a little bit cheaty but I just I can’t get it otherwise basically what you can do is you can put a trap door on top of the target block and then lead a redstone

Thing to go about 30 blocks away and if you put arrows on top of the trap door move 30 blocks away and then trigger the arrows will drop on top of it and actually give you the advancement I really didn’t want to do that but I I

Mean I spent 3 days doing it give me a break and next up I decided to deal with a couple of trident ones the only problem is that for all of them I needed lightning and by the looks of the sky I don’t think there’s going to be any rain

Anytime soon so let’s take a break from advancements for the time being I just had to check how many melons I had and crazy enough after collect them all I had exactly five stacks of blocks which I thought was kind of cool and so on day 538 I started putting the melon Castle

Together the first thing I had to do was actually even out the platform I accidentally made it two box shot on one of the sides and five Stacks down there is so little done I going to need so many melons it’s actually kind of crazy there is also this one advancement where

You literally need to spawn an iron golem not like I already have an infinite amount of them already and though I have the pumpkin seeds I’ve never actually gotten myself a pumpkin this entire time so let’s quickly plant them in the sniffer aisle and just well

Wait for them to grow I also got both of the new sniffer plants that you can get from the sniffers and I’m going to be honest with you I’m not really sure what either of them do but uh well here they are there there’s the Sni BLS on day 540

And you now sometimes I like to look at the first 100 days map and just remember that I started all of this with just a single piece of bamboo I feel like I’ve done some crazy things with that accomplishment alone in fact this day was kind of just a lot of remembering

The armor stand Dr Haven and’s classroom big me it’s good times to be honest with you I was just killing time until the pumpkins grew which unfortunately never happened whilst I’m doing that I may as well unclog the iron farm again so for the most part he was pretty much waiting

Around but sadly I didn’t get any pumpkins at a set on day 541 isad waiting around let’s just do stuff I’m very glad I picked up a load Stone all that timeo so this is enough advancement done and for the time being I think I’m done doing advancements I felt like

Occasionally swapping my test would make it less likely me to get burnt out on this world at least in my head that made sense and so after going back to the board and having a look at my options honestly there wasn’t too much that I wanted to tackle at the moment though I

Was able to add on a couple of more things that we’ll definitely do later as well in fact the next day I literally was looking around the island to make sure I had everything I wanted on the to-do board just to add for it basically

Seen any extras I wanted to do just make sure I have everything written down so I don’t forget anything I headed a grand total of one thing I want to add a second bat to the dog and then even later in the day I came up with two so

That with four ideas extra in total but the big task of I saw that I decided that I wanted to get out of the way was the fact that I wanted to make a multi-layered beacon iron at the bottom then gold then Diamond then neite I originally wanted to make a full neide

Beacon but I know that I don’t have enough time and that’s that’s just crazy come on guys I thought it would be funny to put it on top of my head you know the giant head that I’ve got and so I began putting it on there and basically

Measuring it out the only thing that’s worth mentioning is that it’s an even number which means I’d have to make it 10x 10 at the bottom it also means that I would need four beacons at the top which means I have quite a lot of work

To do to get this done if the beacons wasn’t enough I’d also need 12 blocks of neite Yes you heard me blocks 36 blocks of diamond and 64 blocks of iron lucky for me though I need zero blocks of iron because I have that all already

Yay I guess it kind of looks dumb about the rest of it doesn’t it so I decided to buy the big bullet first and go never right mining well I wouldn’t even want to do this myself like I’m looking that I’m The Thinker and havs to do it cuz

This this is crazy anyway I’m just here to tell you the maths of actually getting the neite blocks needed 12 neite blocks is actually much more complicated than it sounds for every block of neite I need nine never right ingots meaning that I need 108 ingots to make the 12

Blocks in question because you need four ancient debris to make one Ingot that means I need to get myself 432 pieces of ancient debris to complete this task to round that down that’s 6.7 Stacks or six stacks and 14 pieces of ancient debris just for these 12 blocks

Great news though I already have two pieces of never right scrap so uh yeah I don’t know how this is the second time I’ve got never hunting in the first 50 days but let’s just mine away and hope for the best 6 days later day 550 and

Honestly I was doing pretty good I had 47 pieces of ancient debris down which was honestly a pretty decent start sadly though I was down to my last carrot and so I decided to head back I don’t want to starve out here and so I got back set

Off the cooker and it took a comfy nap hey future Haven here um I actually forgot to include in the script that I got the ocean Monument trimming I don’t know when exactly that happened but uh here’s a clip of me doing it on the correct day uh shout out to my editor

Gray for figuring this all out they they’re a legend and so on day 551 I have to reload in the food I grabbed the scraps with these scraps I only need six stacks and one scrap to go so I’m going to be there in no time and well there

Was no time like the present so I made sure my pickaxe has some good durability and listen my journey to 1,000 days is going to take a very long time and I want to show you as many days as possible but unfortunately at this point

There is going to be a lot of never right Mining and so I’m just going to go ahead and Skip those days cuz let’s be honest with you nothing is really different between the days thes everybody everybody okay with that everyone cool cool anyway 8 Days Later

Day 500 159 and I got myself a stack of neite and I really needed a break from neite mining so I decided to head back I need to also quickly fix my pickax though so I’m going to mine some quads by the time I got back on day 560 I

Realized that hey it was fun it was the perfect time to get the two advancements that I needed sorry Viller guy I’m sure you won’t be that useful and now I can take a quick nap to skip the next day throwing out the never on day 561 and I

Realized that I’m always wasting a lot of never I should definitely save it but n too late now and with the never cooked I only need 349 never right scraps to complete this or five stacks and 25 debris to go so yeah I need a break I’m not about to do

That and the villagers are just getting louder with the complaint so I guess it would now be time for me to actually build them a new home now did I have a plan and what I was going to do to actually make the village for them

Absolutely not but what I will do is I’ll just start making a nice ring out of quartz and then we’ll just take it from there by the time I had the ring done it was night and then it was to the interior of the Ring I decided to just

Use some Cobble slabs unfortunately the ring was quite big so this was definitely going to take a minute however with the beacon and Swift sneaky definitely was going to be quicker than it normally would be I had it finished by the next night night 563 took a while

But we got there in the end on day 564 and I finally have a new use for Alasia wood fences guys please don’t complain that I’m using orange fences it’s not that bad of wood actually I’ve kind of grown to like it now who am I kiding

It’s the internet anyway I got the fences around on the ring definitely overestimated how many fenes I’ll need and then I went to the Villager house and started carrying out how many beds was and then was going to work out how many houses I was going to make I

Counted a grand total of 35 beds and I thought that if I just make myself 18 houses and put two beds in them that would be quite nice now let me be clear before I begin these won’t be 18 of the best houses you’ll ever see but they are

Going to be houses for them to live in so uh I guess it’s now time for a classic building Montage N And though it’s not complete here we are so uh I ended up instead of doing 18 houses with two beds I have done 12 houses with three beds and then just got some extra beds so there’s all these houses are filled with free beds is the

Design good on them no not at all I mean they’ll get them more space so they shouldn’t complain that much so this this is pretty much where they’re going to live and then over this side is where like the jobs are at the moment it looks

Really basic I’m not fully done but I just want to get like the basics done and then come back later and make it more fancy but for now this is what we’ve got one thing I kind of underestimated is I have no idea how I’m going to get them over here I really

Didn’t think that one through any anyway let me go ahead and try and figure that one out and we’ll take it from there after setting up the customary bamboo bridge I decided the best way to get the villagers over there was Minecraft so I set up a temporary track leaving from

The new villager area to the old villager house and so on day 573 I tried to set this up and I’m going to be 100% honest with you this was a bloody disaster they wouldn’t get close to the track so I tried to put water down to push them closer which definitely worked

But then they clogged up the tracks which just oh my God and then I was was able to get some of them through but the tracks weren’t correctly so they were falling off the edge because they were stuck in the mine cart they were now

Drowning now I just have a bunch of dead villagers and what’s even worse is the ones that did survive are now like out and basically running around like the El the this was honestly awful I only began having some success on the next day day 574 but it was incredibly shortlived

Because now when I was able to get them through for one reason or another they were now coming back basically what was happening over here was the MOs were landing on top of each other and they were clogging the top of the truck so this wasn’t working either I did

Actually come with a very simple solution if I put a water bucket down here it should push the mine carts along it very simple but hey it work but with that water bucket it was finally coming together I just have to occasionally go down there and unclock them and honestly

This was good to go I kept going on day 575 it was mostly fine honestly this was just more annoying than anything but after learning the basics on how to do this I very quickly picked up the pace at least until one flew back and I started getting really concerned that I

Messed something up but I guess I just got unlucky because one one got stuck at the end I don’t know how this happened but I’m not complaining cuz it was really easy to fix and with the last villager sent through I can now clean up

The mine car and get rid of the bridge and even let this guy into the Villager area what a small job I quickly looked around to see if I could find any more villages on day 576 these guys over here made it really easy since they were

Trying to get into the Villager area unfortunately these guys over here was on the other side of the island and I just couldn’t be bothered to try and get them over so I am dealt with them accordingly take that as you will one did take refuge on the boat that I buil

All that time ago I’m going to be honest with you I don’t necessarily mind him there he looks like he kind of belongs there so I’m just going to leave him as is the only thing left in the old villager house was an island Golem keyw

Was now I don’t want to bring this place down but I’m not 100% sure what I’m going to do with this building I’m sure I can find something for the time being let me quickly go ahead and grab some food I’ll go ahead and grab a little bit

Of iron I can breath the villagers with the food that I picked up and I can get the advancement for spawning an iron golem on day 577 after slowly putting my stuff away it was time for for another neite Mining Adventure also the villager

On the boat he was there a day ago I have no idea where he’s gone now I looked everywhere for him I think he may have drowned and don’t ask me how anyway as I’ve already mentioned I do need a lot of neite I decided that with my

Neite mining trips I’m just going to get a stack at a time and come back later so I began mining away on day 577 and apparently 8 days or 2 and 1/2 hours is the lucky number day 585 and I had another stack of never right scraps so

It’s time for me to head back by the time I got back it was the 9 of night 586 and I began cooking on 587 with the extra debris I was able to get I only need 254 to go which is basically the equivalent of about four Stacks or just

Under also ages ago I have replaced the blast furnaces with normal furnaces when I was cooking terra cotta and I forgot to replace them back by the time I noticed and actually did replace them uh the neite had already cooked up so I kind of wasted a little bit of time

There if only I didn’t have all of it in the world I finished it by basically checking on my melons had another two stacks wor so I decided to add it to the castle it only put a dent into the amount of work that I want to do on it

But for the time being it’s good to go there was pretty much one last thing I wanted to do on day 588 for the Villager area and that was to add a beacon I could have replaced the beacon in the old villager house but I decided to just

Get a brand new Beacon and so I flew over to the nether fortress to get myself some wither skulls cuz I’m going to need to go ahead and kill a Wither literally the second wither skeleton and I got myself a skull so this was a good

Start in fact this was quite a quick Adventure all together it was only day 590 or two days days later and I killed two wither skeletons uh 5 minutes apart and I got myself two more wither schools I literally had all of them very very quickly I even maned to get back the

Same day honestly this was very quick compared to some Journeys I’ve done and on day 591 well I’m going to be honest with you this is the baby way to do it but I F the Wither I ate a god apple and then pretty much went to town on the guy

With my sword don’t take that out of context please seriously I barely even took any damage by the end of it and that was pretty simple so I grabbed the Wither Scar and headed up I was one glass sh of course I was also I thought

You could use dyed glass for some reason I was very wrong anyway after cooking up a single piece of glass I got the beacon down and I started using the iron box that I collected over the time to set up a new Beacon I don’t know why but

Setting up a beacon from the top going down to the bottom felt really weird to me like I’m so used to going bottom to top especially when it was underwater it wasn’t too bad though cuz the it is just a beacon but we got there in the end on

Day 592 I decided I wasn’t fully done with the beacon so I decided to make this bamboo fence thingy technical ter I know basically I just didn’t like the way a beacon look and it was just floating so I started adding some bamboo ow stupid pu fish and it is done I don’t

Know why I killed a fish on the way out but there you go you also see the Among Us statue really well from here anyway I grabbed some things to make a little bit of a garden made that little Garden area with some trees and it was done for the

First time in what felt like forever I could finally take something off of the to-do board I just wanted to show you on day 593 by the way that this is a lot of my footage just me storing stuff away in the storage hul like seriously the

Amount of times I did it it probably be 100 days itself anyway with another task done then I’m going to go say it with me never right mining that is lava hey straight to never right as well that’s cool I knew pretty much straight away

That it was going to be a good trip for me when within the first 5 minutes I had four separate veins of neite and that’s excluding the one that I found straight away so I had hoped I could potentially be my 8 day timer and boy did I it only

Took 6 days this time so I’m going to see if I can beat that next time but in 6 days I was able to get myself a stack of never rides I very quickly head home where it was day 600 the first Milestone of the 1,000 days video I cooked up the

Neite I now have four stacks of scraps ready to go I only need about two and a half more stacks and I would be good to go on that side but I really need to take a break from never right Mining and besides today is a very very special day

It is map day so just like every 100 days I got myself four maps and did a checkout of the area created the four maps in the four corners and I finally had a use for the old villager house I decided that I was going to put the map

Boards in there and I’ll fully fill it up by the time I reached day 1000 I had the first map in and would you just look at that honestly the map so far has hasn’t really updated that much other than the new villager area but it’s definitely a noticeable change 100 of

The 500 Days done only 400 too oh boy I did come to a decision on day 6001 I really wasn’t happy with the fact that the beacon was on top of my head so for the time being I think I’m going to move it I want to make a proper platform for

It at some point and I’m thinking that I should use Blackstone for it cuz I haven’t used Blackstone yet and I don’t know why for the time being I think I’m going to put it over here I’ll put some temporary blocks in for the time being I

Also did another quick check of my iron situation yeah I think I’m good and so on day 600 du when I entered the ne I started looking for Blackstone I’m not going to lie I’m not 100% sure exactly where Blackstone spawns at the top of my

Head I want to say Bol biome but I really wasn’t sure it didn’t matter in the end though cuz I was lucky enough to find myself a Bastion I’m sure they don’t matter if I just borrow that wall I guess and once I had it enough I headed straight back home and started

Working on the pathway pretty much straight away it is really basic but like I say I’ve never used Blackstone so it is going to stand out when you look around the world though on day 603 okay some people might be annoying me here but I decided yet again I wasn’t happy

With the location so I’m going to move it I decided to just leave the bridge as it is cuz I will put something there at some point but I want to put the beacon somewhere else it took me until day 604 to settle with this location over here

And once I had it all in with lanterns of course I think it was going to look really good when I get the beacon in the most important thing about this Beacon is that actually it is technically smaller than the beacon I was planning

On top of my head so uh means I’ve got less to build yes it does Haven yes it does we need less never right now the original Beacon that I was planning to build on top of my head actually had a base layer of 10x 10 and obviously that

Means that every base above it is bigger in case you don’t know the bottom layer of a beacon is only supposed to be 9 by 99 so that means I was shoren the amount of everything I needed by quite a lot so of the top of the beacon instead of

Needing a 4×4 neite grid I now only need a 3X3 neite grid doing the maths including the neite that I’ve already got I only need 74 more ancient debris scraps to actually complete this free by fre grid definitely less dating than and the over two stacks that I originally

Needed I will go and get that neite real real soon but for the time being I actually do need to restock on my food I was waiting for the farm to finish doing its thing but it was taking a while so I just said I’m going to come back to you

Later and repun and so it was into the never on day 605 now it usually takes me about 8 days to get a single stack of neit in this particular case I need a stack and then 15 extra pieces of ancient debris so it was definitely going to take slightly longer at least

Also if you’re ever wondering what I do whilst I am never I’m mining uh well looking the C of all yeah it’s this SP right so this one took even longer than usual it was day 617 about 4 hours it actually took me to get the 80 pieces of hent debris needed

I mean I had one spam I’m sure I could do something with that but I was able to get back the same day and I start cooking them away even mind to sneaking a little nap isn’t that cute and on day 618 I don’t think I’ve had as many never

Write scraps in one place like I have here unfortunately we now have to do more maths and I’m luckily not a nerd so I’ll let the doctor take over that was a little bit rude anyway as I mentioned the top layer of this multi-layer Beacon needs to be never that is mostly slded

So let’s talk about the gold layer and the diamond layer that’s underneath it let’s start with the diamonds cuz that’s pretty straightforward the second layer of a beacon is five blocks by five blocks which means you need 25 blocks of that material to make it 25 blocks nine

Diamonds each 25 * 9 means I need 225 diamonds or three and 1 half stacks to make the 5×5 layer the gold layer is actually a little bit more complex obviously you have the 7×7 layer which sits underneath it or about 49 blocks 49 obviously times 9 cuz that’s how you

Make a block means I need 441 gold ingots to make the 7×7 layer however I only have neite scraps and not neite ingots and you of course need gold for the neveri ingots the grand total that I needed for the neveri scraps was 324 that that would get me enough scraps

To make enough Ingus to make enough blocks of course you need four neiz scraps to make the iner but you also need four gold to make the Inger which means I need an additional 324 gold to make the Ingus as well as make all the layers adding all that together means I need

765 gold ingots or just under 12 stacks of gold to actually complete this Beacon oh boy that’s a lot now I could technically make a gold Farm but I never have done and I really fancied to b a cave and so I decided to also for anybody wondering if I having enough

Iron I do I’m not going to go Cav just yet though firstly I’m going to tend to my Farms I was able to get all the carrots and tatoes back down and I might even start baking some potatoes I don’t know why I haven’t upgraded my food

Source from just your carrots in a while day 619 and I checked on the melon farm and I noticed that the mine cart was full it was picking up all the melons but wasn’t depositing them away quickly enough so I wasn’t getting all the melons that I needed and so I made a

Couple of tweaks I basically added five additional Hoppers to the system so hopefully more will now fall in there which will hopefully clear out the minecart it is also worth mention I was able to get myself a couple extra stacks of melons during that time day 620 just

Just blaze it I I guess I started adding the melons back down to the castle and I finally reached how high I actually want to make this melon Castle now I do need an additional five or six Stacks to complete the walls but we are making some decent progress there now for

Something a little more uh sus now to be fair for those who watched it in the trio Survival Island I did the exact same thing maybe you should go check that out at some point but I really like this build so I am decided to build it

Again here’s a completed version on day 622 it does look very uh sus I’m not sure what I’ll do with it but I’m just happy that it’s on the island and with that done I just can’t put it off any longer I need to go caring get myself

Plenty of diamonds and even more gold so on this day 622 I headed into the caves so there was a lot of caving here and not really much happened during the in between time so I’m just going to update every 5 days starting at day 625 Within

These 3 days I was able to get myself two stacks of gold but only three diamonds so uh not a great start on the diamonds I must say 5 days later on day 630 I I had seven stacks of gold so I was actually very close to completing

That one I also was able to obtain 50 diamonds so I was definitely making progress at this point by day 635 I had got all the gold that I needed which means I just need to go ahead and start mining some diamonds the easy part of

This is I can now lower my y level to go to Diamond level C it should be quite easy to find diamonds at this point and by day 640 I am not kidding I was one Diamond sh for being completed here so I have to keep caving for one diamond oh I

Wish I was kidding lucky for me it only took until the next day day 641 to find the extra diamond and our 39 day caring trip that’s right 39 days were finally complete I got back home the next day day 642 and I began cooking away all the

Gold now that one extra Diamond I got it was enough to get myself one extra diamond block so I guess I miscounted that one and for most of the day I was pretty much just really excited to get this Beacon made so I was just waiting

For the gold to cook I didn’t mind waiting out on day 643 but here we go I got the nine neite NE blocks done I just need to wait for the last of the gold to cook which didn’t take any time at all and now for my creation it took many

Days of never ride mining gold collecting Diamond obtaining iron well well I had all the iron but I finally created my masterpiece missing something son of I forgot the dam bacon well I want to get that sorted as quick as possible so on day 644 I went straight

Back into NE and started killing some wither skeletons I got my first score done pretty quickly All Things Considered by day 645 I had got the second skore so good progress so far and in three days in a row by say 646 I had gotten my third skull let’s head home by

The time I got back on day 647 I headed straight into the caves and started fighting the Wither I totally didn’t do either baby Way by trapping him in a cave or something guys don’t don’t don’t call me baby please I also failed the potion kill I’m sorry guys guys I’m

Really letting the team down here well let’s get back up and cook up some glass I have zero obsidian well I guess we’re going back into the caves in this case I actually grabbed a bunch of obsidian you never know when you might need obsidian in the future also want to mention I

Don’t think I’ve ever Mind obsidian with an efficiency 5 neite pickaxe look at it go it breaks so quickly that’s awesome and the big day day 648 let’s make the beacon I don’t know why I only thought I needed free glass H but here we go didn’t have anything to

Activate it all right now we do look at it I’m like a proud dad who’s just made his creation like a bench or something oh it’s [Applause] fantastic I also did check on the melon farmer Again by the way while still getting clogged even with the additional Hoppers so I decided to just cut to the Chas and add about 50 more Hoppers and hopefully that will fix it I was still

Working on it on day 649 I started by testing it by throwing in my baked potatoes but for some weird reason it kept getting stuck on this particular Hopper it didn’t take me long to realize that the reason it was stopped was because of the Redstone St so I had to

Tweak it a little bit and move some Redstone and move some Hoppers around I was able to test it again by throwing in this obsidian and this time it has worked we have lift off now there’s no way I don’t have enough Hoppers here there’s like literally a stack in there

If this somehow still gets clogged I don’t know what to do that being said of course there was a problem pretty much straight away luckily for me it was an easy fix though though it does look like there isn’t enough power to get it all

The way from one side to the other so I will have to sacrifice at least one of these Hoppers for a power rail it is finally working though so we should be good to go and our day 650 firstly made myself quite a bit of infantry space and

Then I started making as many melons as possible and I was able to get the walls on the castle as high as I want I just need to add some details but of course that will require more melons which I now don’t have we all getting there though it’s worth mentioning I also

Remember to check the to-do ball for the first time in forever it doesn’t seem like there’s many tasks here but each individual task will take a very long time so that’s fun on day 651 I decided yet again I was going to try and see if

I can get some bees now as far as I’m aware the only place that bees can spawn is on birge trees and oak trees so I went to each individual Island and chopped down all the wood and replanted the saplings just got to keep hoping

That 5% chance will happen for me I also checked in on the melon farm yet again still looks good so I’m pretty happy with that one and then finally I went to check on the villages to make sure everything was okay over here everything seems fine though there is a lack of

Cats which is bit surprising usually I’m infested with them on day 652 I need to get myself some Spruce Woods for my next build so let’s chop down some trees how in the world did the sniff get out sniff sneaky little thing well can’t really call him little boy

You know what I mean anyway there’s a really simple way to get a lot of spruce wood you just have to make a 4×4 and then bone meal it a bunch and that way you’ll just have all the Spruce Wood you’ll ever need after spending pretty

Much the entire day doing this uh yeah I think I I think I have enough wood and on day 653 well it was finally time to build the second boat I’ve been talking about doing it for about 200 days at this point so let’s do it you know the

Best way to do it with a nice simple building Montage well I had it completed by day 657 I have to admit it is much more basic than the first one but I think it does the job for what I wanted it to be we going finally cross that one off the board as well I also want to mention as well that

The auto Farms that I have on the island are working fantastically like the bamboo Farm is fantastic this iron farm is just it’s phenomenal I’ve never seen as good as an iron farm in my entire life that is so small in combat this is just a great iron farm like here’s me

Accidentally making a bunch of shears by accident but I just I just didn’t care because I have so much iron spare that I could just throw these shears out and just get more R this is just fantastic a neat little trick that I learned on day

658 is that you can use glass panes and put them on top of a beacon to change the color of the beacon and the best part about that is that you actually can’t see the glass paint so it just looks like the beacon color is actually different so after faffing around a

Little bit I got a green one over there there’s a yellow one right there the blue is in the middle there’s a pink one over there and then The Far Side you can see the black one nice multicolored be is great anyway let’s focus on getting

Some good food in here so I quickly grabbed some tatoes and start cooking those bad boys up I went back to the melon Castle on day 659 where I was able to finish the outer walls I can finally start working on the inner walls and actually make sort of a wall thing like

Castles normally have of course I ran out of melons very quickly I mean shocker I know when I did go back to the melon farm though I noticed a lack of Minecart sounds and when I went in there y the mine c car just stopped for some

Reason not really sure why this happened but I just simply restarted it and it seemed to work fine again so I’ll just have to keep an eye on it I I guess I also knew during my times I definitely saw a new cat in the Villager area I was

100% confident of it so went over there with my fish and yeah I don’t know I I just couldn’t find this cat either I’m delusional which I don’t think I am I’m fairly confident I saw the cat but yeah no idea where I went day 660 a m was a

Little bit of a slow day I started by checking the newly grown trees and sadly there was no beehive of them so I decided to do a little bit of research I am right in saying that beehives can spawn on Birch and oak trees it looks like they can only spawn in specific

Biomes and this entire island is either Beach or some form of ocean so I don’t think they could spawn here sadly so I am just going to cross off bees from any future test that I want to do after that I was just looking for the next location

Of where I wanted to build and I decided that what I want to do is extend the original Blackstone Bridge into the water a little bit and then I’m going to do a build there so I needed more Blackstone so on day 661 I returned back

To the nether I actually found up AA biome this time and I was right this is where you find the Blackstone and so I started of of course mining away once I had enough Blackstone I did actually spend a couple of minutes fixing up my pickaxe by mining myself some quartz

Before flying back home I got back on the same day though the sun was setting I did get to work on day 662 by extending the bridge far into the water and after spitballing a few ideas I decided to set up with this wooden frame

Kind of thing the idea is that I wanted to look like it’s in some sort of box obviously I’ll have them extend themselves and there will be some Stills that go down into the water Mak makes it look like that’s what’s holding up the

House I had quite a lot done by day 66 free I mean here here we are basically the inside is Jord I just need to do the roof and a couple of more details would be good to go that being said it is pretty basic but who cares I quickly

Went back home and grabbed all the cats and then found them a nice little spot for them all to put in where it’s under places over places but nice little place for them to live and on day 664 I got some carpets in I did a little bit more

Interior design and now it was time to work on the roof and oh boy was it a big job sadly I can’t show you because I accidentally stopped recording here and didn’t start recording until now day 667 why I had it completed that definitely says cat up there trust me I’m the one

Who RIT it I’ve shown you the bottom floor but this is basically what I’ve got up top again it’s really basic and other than me adding some fences just to make it look a bit more natural this is pretty much what the cat house is going

To be not perfect but I can’t Blain I can go back to the board cross it off I did quickly check to see if any more casts spawn in the village but unfortunately no there is plenty of Golems though for anybody who’s counting and so on day 668 I decided to let’s go

Back and work on a couple more advancements the most simple one that I found that I could do is the two that you can do that involves Striders one of them does require you to make a very long lava path in the Overworld so I did

Have to make this path down here and then work on clearing out the water and with that done I now just have to keep going into The Nether picking up a lava Bucky and putting them down and on day 669 with the lava done I just had to

Quickly go back to the ne and grab a strier boy now the first advancement is as easy as could be and the second one wasn’t too much harder admittedly I got him into the Overworld did one little small ride and perfect you you live here

Now uh you can you can have fun the next advancement I was looking for does require me to get some crying obsidian and I believe that Bastion should have them and I know there is one nearby that’s where I got the Blackstone from and as far as IW I didn’t explore it yet

So get in there and searching all the chests that were there admittedly there was a bunch of cool useful stuff in there including this chest right here which honestly would be the perfect chest under normal circumstances it had pigstep it had food it had a trimming

But it only had two crying obsidian the one one thing that I needed it didn’t have which was very unfortunate I definitely looked out though on day 670 whilst looking for a second Bastion I actually found myself a broken nether portal in the wall and this broken Nether Portal had exactly enough cry

Obsidian for me to actually be able to make a respawn Beacon by fully maxing out a respawn Beacon you have yourself another advancement not too shabby Haven not too shabby you know you think 671 days into this world I would know this storage hook like the back of my hand

And where every single chest is is but just just no you’d be entirely wrong now for something that is actually quite Evil And when I say quite evil I mean very evil first they had to make sure that the king didn’t get involved with this maliciousness so I’ll uh just tie

Him to the fence post and lead him away now you may think that it was me who tied him to the fence post but that is fake news don’t tell to the presses it wasn’t me but I did lead his children over to this new area because I’m going

To need a lot of chickens for my new plan I wanted to make a automatic chicken farm hey there’s a Wonder Trader over here man his stuff is just useless ah King how did you end up ATT tied to this post I was to the other side of the

Island the entire time I wouldn’t know never mind let me just free you really quickly so I got to work on the evil Contraption on day 672 I’ll show you this little mini targe of me making it for the most part it was relatively simple it also relatively small so you

Didn’t take that long at all I did kind of mess up by letting the chickens out at one point but don’t worry that one happened again here it is happening again on day 67 frame course and with the chickens in and everything good as far as I’m aware this should be good to

Go I guess well I’ll just um wash and wait yeah day 674 and I think it was working I mean there is a baby chicken in there so as far as I’m we it’s good to go I actually left for like 2 seconds to check on the iron farm and when I

Came back the chicken had gone and now I had cooked chicken in there so uh yeah I would say that my KFC machine is now working in case you’re sure how this is working basically what will happen is the chickens up here will lay egg and it

Will be shot by the dispenser over here the babies will spawn and they’ll be perfectly fine but the moment they grow to adults the lva above it will kill it dropping the chicken into this Hopper which will put in this chest meaning it very high have unlimited chicken I’ll

Leave it to do his thing and check it a little bit later to see how much chicken it does give me I also realized that this point that all of my gear wasn’t maxed out I still only had efficiency 4 tools which is just what am I doing

Finally get to use this Village Trader Hall it’s only been forever I already had one efficiency 4 book so I ended up buying two more I didn’t need the third one in the end cuz my pickax was already efficiency 5 but I was able to open my

Shovel and my axe to both efficiency 5 as well day 675 and I cleared up the temporary chicken farm where I left the the chickens to originally I checked on the king luckily for me and everyone around he’s doing perfectly fine how did you get out again how how are they

Escaping just get in there you know why are they even just get in there and then I found myself another cat in which I quickly timed sadly this was a cat that I already had so I can’t work towards the catalog advancement but I don’t have

To worry about that for now what I should worry about instead is that I now have quite a few extra bills but no paths leading towards them so I need to grab myself some extra oak wood once I had a good bit of oak wood on day 676 I

Was just running around the island seeing if there’s anything that needed a path leading to it and then of course I built a path straight towards it it was a pretty simple day and I made sure everything was good to go but uh there you go now the paths are all sorted I

Checked on the melon farm again on day 677 and yet again I didn’t hear my C car sounds for some weird reason the exact same spot it was stopping both times my only theory is over time it kept slowing down and so I decided to add an additional Redstone track on there to

Hopefully keep it speeding up hopefully this will fix it again we’ll have the chicken in a couple of days for the time being let’s grab the melons we can do carry on building and a out of melons I mean I should just copy and paste the audio from earlier let’s be honest I

Head back over to the village on day 678 where I had found myself some cats two new cats two new variants I really wanted to tame them as quick as possible I quickly grabbed the fish I got over to the first carat and he barely took any

Fish at all the second one and uh come on oh my God you fat little kid will you just oh thank you I don’t know how many fish that was I’m sure gray will tell us thanks gray and I put them in the cap home for the record that is five hat

Variants now done only six more to go I didn’t really do much for the rest of the day I did nearly eat my G Apple which would have been funny for you guys i’ have been Furious so I have a little bit of a problem entering day

679 yeah here is the to-do board that I made I think it was like the early 500s of everything that I wanted to do pretty much all of these that are on here uh require me to wait a bit what I mean by that is is uh obviously the monreal

Would like to add something to go all the way around the island that you can sort of look at on a monreal but I don’t want to build it just yet just in case I like start expanding and stuff uh the melon Castle I’m just waiting for melons

To grow there’s not really much to say there the advancement hunt there is still stuff to do but a lot of it is just kind of like tedious or just a bit you know of a pain so I’m kind of holding off on that for as long as I can

The Hall of Haven is what I’ve dubed it it’s basically I want to build something that like holds a bunch of cool stuff that I collected over the time like but that again that needs to be done towards the end fanade build I think I’m going to just wait until 1.20 officially comes

Out cuz I am still technically in the snapshot as you can see at at the top so once that happens then I’ll then I’ll do something cuz I have an idea for that the point is that the the five things on here either require a bit of waiting or

You know I don’t want to do for quite a while 18 days in just under I’m kind of out things to do right now I may need to take a little break and think about some stuff that I need to do but that’s kind of where my mindsets out at the moment

Look how far we’ve come by the way look look how little we had on here I mean if you ignore the Among Us that shouldn’t be there but look look at that we we freaking we had nothing but there was a melon farm like right here that’s where

My Farms used to be oh my God I still left the melons how long were the melons here for the melons were there are free what I only changed the melons from day 500 I had that terrible melon farm 400 Days in that’s kind of funny I’m not

Going to lie anyway that’s pretty much my my live update and that’s currently what I’m thinking is that I’m pretty much done everything that I wanted to do that doesn’t require me to do a lot of waiting I guess I could go on an achievement hunt spam I guess but

There’s not a lot of these I can do I mean to give you a rundown I can’t do the bead ones can’t do that can’t do that I can do that but again that requires a lot of waiting I guess I could technically do that uh I could do

These two again no no and now I thought I could do balanced diet but I just can’t because there’s no way for me to get like beef or mutton like there’s no way for me to get them off the top of my head I guess I could look into it a

Little bit but still on easier lines I hate that advancement I guess I’ll do it as some point uh then there’s Furious cocktail and how did we get here I tried to do how did we get here before in the 1,000 days the only other thousand days I’ve ever done failed spectacularly as

Far as I’m aware I don’t think I would be able to do this now I could be wrong but the one that’s sort of making me think I don’t think I can do this is jump boost cuz I believe you need a rabbits for and I can’t do that there

Might be certain ways to do it but that’s that’s the one I can’t think of I’m not even sure if I can do Furious cocktail actually now that I think about it over than that maybe I can do everything else but I don’t know there’s a bunch here I could technically get is

It a bird by looking at a spy glass like look at a bird as I’m flying over but I feel like that’d be kind of cheaty I don’t know could do that I just have to head back to the Asian City monsters hunted I thought I could do I don’t

Think I’d be able to kill a husk or a stray so that’s kind of out the window power books I guess I could do I don’t really think I can get a total of a Dying actually that’s not true if I can get a Pillager attack which if I

Remember correctly I’ve had one that’s why I’ve got that flag I won all the way back in the first 100 day so that’s uh that’s fun uh the smithing we style I can’t do cuz I can’t get vexo tide I believe it is I don’t remember which one

It is I know I can’t get two of them but I can get the other six I mean I’m not really bothered about these I guess I could technically get them but I’d have to get a Pillager so that’s pretty straightforward can’t get that can’t get

That can’t get that got all the end ones I’ve already been through this one so there is a handful I can still get and there’s a handful that I can’t get so I guess that’s probably what I’m going to do next yeah a lot of these lot of these

Are going to be a bit painful I guess we’ll keep moving so the first thing I did on say 680 was I started looking for some glow squids I thought maybe below me in that water cave that I searched all the way in the first 100 days there

Was some glow squids cuz there were some there when obviously I surged it originally but I couldn’t seem to find any I then wondered that over these 600 plus days surely at some point I would have picked up a glow squiding but uh no I couldn’t find any of the chests around

Me I did have a quick glance around the oceans nearby but couldn’t see anything shining so fortunately I’ll have to do that one later for now I guess I’ll just sett with tactical fishing I haven’t done that one for some weird reason since I can’t find a glow squid let’s

Move on to something else how about killing a mob near a skull catalyst the only problem is the only ancient city nearby me is not nearby at all so I had to go ahead and do a little bit of a run now I have no idea what day it was when

I got here and in fact as soon as I did get here I basically nearly spawned a warden straight away so that would have been fun we’ll take the skeleton skull though don’t know why I left them before now it actually took me a second to find

Any mobs whatsoever but eventually I was able to find a single zombie I just had to leave him over to the Catalyst and there you go that’s another advancement done all right now we just got to head home all right bear with me by the time

I got back it was day 600 83 I should say night 683 it’s way past my bedtime next up on day 684 I need to get a villager into the sky and soul soil unfortunately doesn’t do it I quickly popped into The Nether had to deal with

A couple of pigling not a problem I grabbed myself some soulsand and began to leave what the was that after that I started going up to make a platform at the sky limit did you know that it takes absolutely forever to get up here at least we could jump down and that was

Kind of cool day 685 and up we go I forgot for Soul Sand you need to make all the Box Source blocks or else the bubble thing doesn’t work but I felt that that would take too long and make too much of a mess so I just decided to

Do it in the normal way admittedly this was uh probably slower in the grand scheme of things but uh you know what we we’re making progress up and it is a okay we got it by the end of the day which was nice I came back the next day

On day 686 just to basically clean it up it wasn’t midle and is saw the Villager made his own way down and uh yeah this took most the day literally just digging this all the way down yeah it was longer than I thought it was going to be and

Just as I was leaving I found myself an orange cap with the sniffers of course the orange cat would be there of course it’s an orange cat this is orange cat behavior if you know you know he was very quickly tamed it was a perfect end

Of the day woo I quickly returned to the village on day 687 cuz I was looking for more cats sadly there was no kitties around this time so instead let’s check on the chicken killer only six cooked chicken really H that’s not really that good now to do an advancement that I

Just absolutely hate I need to get myself on easy Alliance if you don’t know I have to get a gas of the Overworld and kill it and I really don’t enjoy doing this one but U here we go so the first task I did on day 688 was to

Get myself some more obsidian I ended up minding myself a stack and then I found myself a giant cave where I began to make myself a giant bottle now I don’t know how in the world I managed to get attacked by an Enderman up here but I

Thought it was cool enough to show also I wish I could tell you that I perfectly planned this out and just got a perfect size but no I was just luy and made the portal at the perfect size so uh go me and as I went through the portal it

Ended up teleporting me back to my original portal which is uh not good I end up going back through which took me all the way back to my spawn Island uh yeah I guess I’ll have try again tomorrow I got back on day 689 the first thing I did was I mined a

Bunch of obsidian cuz I remember that I have to make the portal on the other side as well then using a overw to never portal converter I was able to figure out exactly where this portal needs to be about 50 blocks away from my first portal of course it was with the portal

Made of fortunately there’s a lot of Gaff around it so I am going to have to go ahead and clear that out now War blocks are quite annoying to destroy but Google says that if you use a hoe then you should be break them quite quickly

So I’m going to quickly head home and grab myself a home it took me a second but here we are on day 690 where I clearly out also you want to see something funny over there just up there there where my main portal is and uh if

You look all the way over here here a turtle has made an absolute run for it don’t know why the turtle’s so determined to get away from me but it is also I F in lava so yeah over an hour but on day 694 using my third fishing rod I was

Able to get a gas into the Overworld thank Christ uneasy Alliance is done I will avoid doing that advancement for as long as possible now with day 695 right here I decided to do something a little early and that was make the maps for the 700 day board I had a

Couple of big plans when day 7 00 hit so I decided to do this one early and then just basically wait out until day 700 the map for the most part looks relatively similar over than the giant lava bar on the top left of the layer

Beacon you can see at the top honestly a good map looking overall and though I was planning to wait until day 700 I was actually surprised that when 700 came well it was a big day for Minecraft entirely just before we get to day 700 we have something to do for those who

Saw it when I did it 4 days ago I put this out you wanted a chance to feature in the 1,000 days 1.20 Survival Island first your ‘s below and pick and I’ll pick a lucky winner now I think a couple of people got confused and people were

Like oh pick me I want to play with you unfortunately that’s not what I meant I simply just wanted your skin because moment of truth I’m going to build someone’s skin in my in my Minecraft world and I think that’s going to be kind of cool just as a thank you to one

Of you guys for you know being so supportive over 2023 it’s been it’s been a really good time so what I’ve done as you can see there are 67 comments here and I have a random number generator that goes from 1 to 67 so one of the

Random people from here will be picked and obviously that means that this guy is one this person is two this person is three and I’m just gonna randomly put a number generator out there and basically pick a winner just want to give a quick shout out to this guy Knight who says he

Loves my videos thank you Knight as you can see Knight hasn’t put his IGN in the comment which means obviously I can’t really pick anybody if that does happen and I get a comment that is they don’t really say a name or I can’t find the

Skin or something then I will just pick the person above so in this case if I did get number two then obviously I would pick I don’t even know how to pronounce this guy’s name but you know there there you go all right then random number generator let’s do this

38 all right let me just quickly count 38 down 35 36 37 and lucky number 38 I eat potato chips great name uh well if as long as they have a decently all right skin I they would count as my winner all right then let’s let me just

Quickly check that skin you know what that’s a pretty pretty type of skin potato chips uh yep so congratulations to Mr Potato Chips Mrs Potato Chips potato chips themselves I’m going to build this skin in in the survival island world so uh you know thank you all for leaving your comments I’m sorry

For everyone who didn’t get picked but yeah this looking person let’s let’s build a skin so Minecraft uh released 1.20 a couple of days ago it was June 7th when they released it June 8th and June 9th I was working on a different video which uh you know 24 hours in

Minecraft not my smartest decision today is June 10th and yeah look look at we go look look at all look at all isnit so 1.20 is officially here that is wild I remember starting this in the first ever snapshots what five 5 months ago and we’re actually now at 1 20 we’re also

700 days in into this world starting this video on day 500 so we’re 200 days and we got 300 to go my goal is to get this out by the end of July we shall see and the first thing we’re going to do is uh we’re going to build what was his

Name potato chips’s skin uh I need to find a good location let me just quickly check the map I’m thinking I might do it over there with the Cherry uh tree wasall where there’s that little island thing that might be a good idea if not I might might build something past the mob

Grinder and build it there I’ll uh I’ll decide when that time comes but yeah we are officially in 1.20 took forever to get there but here we are so uh 300 days to go looking at the stuff as well I mean pretty much most of these will be

Probably done in the next 100 days if I so decide so I really to find some new stuff to do but uh that’s for future me to decide not current me so after looking at a couple of different spots I ended up deciding to build it past the

Mob grinder I will need to extend the bridge B just couple so that shouldn’t be an issue you know what is annoying me on day 7001 let me just quickly move the day counter and this for this right here it won’t go away until I break wood

Whose idea was that I’m 700 days into this world and they think I need tips on how to play like seriously so after very quickly extending the bridge much thanks to Swift sneak itself I took another a quick look at the skin again it is mainly black which means I’m going to

Need a lot of black dye the original plan was for me to just fly around and kill a bunch of squids but I did have a problem I have very little gunpowder and so little sugarcane to spare and because of how little fireworks I have for the

First time in this world well I’m going to need to set myself up a creeper and a sugarcane farm because to be honest with you these 23 fireworks that are on my name at the moment yeah it’s not a lot let’s do the easy one first which is the

Sugarcane farm out of all things that I don’t have on day 702 I cannot believe Cobblestone is on that list to be clear I do have plenty of deep slay but you need observers and pistons for this type of farm that I’m wanting and they only accept cobblestone in the crafting

Recipe and so I’m going to need a bunch of gobble I started mining away until I got 20 observers and 28 Pistons I decided on a good spot to get to work on this on day 703 and after faf it around a little bit I got to work placing the

Sugarcane observers and pistons I did however make one mistake I made this Farm 28 long and for some weird reason I thought that I had enough observers and piss to do that but since this is a double-sided sugarcan Farm I need to get 28 more I swear to God I’m not that dumb

Usually but I do need to go and get more Cobble and then on day 704 after making enough that I needed I got them all in then I just had to get the redstone on there I did have to extend the platform a little bit then I went to pee

Apparently was a long pee and by the time I got back on day 705 my idea was to have a water source pushing the sugar C into these Hoppers this will lead to an individual chest which whil not the most efficient in the world it really doesn’t need to be because let’s be

Honest sugarcan Farms need lift up so quickly now it didn’t necessarily look that amazing but it’s more about getting it to work rather than making it look fancy and that’s the exact reason why it’s taking me 4 days day 706 and The Hoppers were very annoying to play you

Have to sh shift in the water but that will make you go down in the water and if you don’t shift at the right time then you’ll go into the H it was a pain also a Wandering Trader showed up he was about as useful as the others I threw my

Axe and my pickaxe Into The Hoppers it of course works like a charm let’s get the sugarcane in wait a second I’ve put the Pistons in The Observers one too low haven’t I well I guess I’m going to have to restart that one what I will admit on

Day 707 that nothing and I mean absolutely nothing is more demoralizing than having to redo a bunch of work that you’ve just done but here I am doing it in a not so live audience I would be more mad but to be honest with you I’ve

Got 300 more days to go before this world then so I’m not really rushing to do with literally anything at least I will be done soon once I get a few extra blocks cuz apparently I’m just a few blocks short let me just quickly grab that and great now let’s get the sugar

Cane in perfect very soon I will want to make it look a little bit more fancy but for now is good yeah that’s German for it’s good yes at least I hope so and then on day 78 final a couple of touches to make it a bit more fancy I added some

Bamboo to the wall to replace the Cobblestone I kept not bringing enough so it was a lot of back and forth grabbing more bamboo blocks but by the end of the day I was happy with everything that I had replaced it was a very easy very simple Farm but it will

Give me the sugar can I need right then next up with the creeper farm and oh boy I’m not looking forward to that do you know what I learn on day 709 did you know that you can repair shields in an anvil with wooden planks cuz I I had no

Idea I decided that I didn’t want to keep doing that though so I’m just going to put mending on my shield and then it should never break I also whilst looking at my armor realized that I was missing an inchant and that was fors lucky for

Me I had a villager in the village Trader Hall that was trading forns for ebooks so I am a few en rolles sure which really wasn’t a problem a new wondering Trader showed up as well I don’t even know why I’m checking at this point I’ll be honest with you I bought

The last book and started adding it to my armor at least I W but I’m actually a few levels sure cuz I need quite a few to get this done well I can add them onto my armor a little bit later here we are on day 710 where first update on the

Chicken farm and I’m getting plenty of fethers but not much chicken which is kind of the whole point at least I was getting plenty of melons oh right sorry melon I still have a long way to go on the melon Castle but we are getting there also I really thought it would be

A problem with leather but honestly these llamas are such a good source that I’m actually not struggling for leather at all which is a weird surprise I checked again on day 711 at the sugarcan farm it was working perfectly fine being a while since you’ve been in here well

Dr Haven I’m checking in the next farm that I need to make myself is a gunpowder Farm combining the sugar can with the gunpowder would mean I have an unlimited support of fireworks which means I can use my elra to fly around any anywhere that I wanted to now I have

Made a gun powder Farm in the past ironically in the over 1,000 days video I ever made the problem is that farm requires snowman which of course requires snow and to my knowledge there’s no easy way for me to really get snow so I will have to come up with a

Plan B and that plan was cats I went on YouTube and found a nice design that would allow cats to push creepers into a death chamber basically so we’re going to try that one out and hope it gives us a lot of gunpowder I started the build

On day 712 right next to the sugarcan farm I guess it’s time we do another build building Montage it did tell me after building the farm that I should AFK all the way in the sky so I afked for about 30 minutes which led me to day 717 and when

I went down it was the Moment of Truth zero oh awesome great cool I thought that potentially it could be from the light that came from down below it so I decided to cover the glass and cover of the light it was worth a go and then I

Went back up and went AFK again I left it an hour and came back on day 720 nothing you can see that I am a overjoy to take the least I decided though at this point I needed a break from the creeper Farm I don’t know why

It was working but I will figure it out later at least during this time of AFK and stuff I was able to get myself plenty more melons I had four stacks of melon blocks and those melon blocks did quite a lot to the castle I’m guessing

That maybe a few more stacks and I should be completing with the melon Castle it’s only taken a few hundreds of days you know the usual I looked at the creeper Farm again on day 721 there’s definitely something I’m doing wrong with this you are welcome to yell at me

In the comments just remember that this was recorded probably 2 months by the time I get this uploaded and so I made the very very frustrating decision to basically scrap the farm all together and look for a new design so I started ripping down the farm and on day

722 I had the farm down I instantly started working on the new Farm well at least a mini version of the farm that I found online I’m going to need a little bit more deep slate though looky for me I have plenty so I got to work work is

Still trying along at day 723 the idea was the cats that I stood in the middle here would force the creepers into this Gap they would fall down this water pushing them into this sink of campfire it’s a very simple design but I’m hoping

That it will work I just need to add a couple of the last touches like adding some carpet in and we should be good to go and the last thing to do on day 725 was to get the cats in and once they were in their locations I closed up and

Oh my God I hope this works seriously I mean there is no time like the Pres trade out so I went back up to the AFK Shack in the sky and I went well AFK what do you expect another hour later and this is it here we go oh my God

There’s gunpowder there’s 30 gunpowder that means I was averaging one gunpowder every two minutes which is absolutely terrible but for the time being it will do and in retrospect I probably won’t need that much gunpowder anyway for now as I could store it away and actually

Work on a bridge to this thing I did have a sneak peek into the farmer day 729 and there was just nothing in there I mean it works badly but you know not the first time I’ve had a mob gr work badly on this island just say at least

The sugarcane C is cooking or growing I guess you don’t cook sugarcane what do you all of this work these hours I put in for one and a half stacks of fireworks it’s the joys of Minecraft I’m not going to lie I took so long building

These Farms I actually forgot why I made them in the first place they see me staring into this chest that’s me reading my notes cuz I was like why why did I do this what am I doing here the only other thing I did on this day was I

Found myself a new cat and BR him home that’s 7 out of the 11 needed and then on day 730 after realizing what I was supposed to do I started looking for new spots for the skin because I completely forgot about the spot that I already selected I ended up decided we’re going

Past the cherry trees over here it’ll be a nice spot for it day 731 I can finally set off into the world to get squiding now I do need a decent amount to get this stuff done so I was flying around all day just killing every squid that I

Could find by the end the day I did get myself a stack of squid ink which should be enough to go and though I have the Black Ink by day 732 the thing that I needed to make black was concrete and so I am going to need to make myself some

Concrete powder So I entered into the nether because one of the two things you need for the p powder is gravel the only small issue that I had is that my neite shovel actually has fortune 3 on it which means the Flint chance will be upgraded if I was digging up with this

Shovel end up just using this efficiency one diamond shovel that I had spare and started digging up all the gravel I could end up digging up about four stacks of gravel which I’m fairly confident that will be enough now where am I going to get sand from God the The

Impossible decisions of this world so on day 733 there was a there was a villager in the middle of the ocean you know what I just don’t care and I actually flew over to the ocean ruins that was in the water because it had a sand Island next

To it and I decided that I’m just going to dig up this Sand Island you could make the argument that I’m using new land here but quite frankly I’d rather Destroy This Island than destroy a lot of my own Island just to get sanded Al guys literally it’s a small island in

The middle of the water when what am I gaining from this other than sand once I made all the black concrete powder I started placing it in the water before using my brain and realizing there’s a much smarter way to do this by placing it on land a little bit of water mixed

Into our day s 134 and I started mining it up I even made myself a little bit of red concrete as well I do also need terra cotta and I was fairly confident I had some somewhere from when I made the pigstep art however other than this little red over here I genuinely

Couldn’t find any so I guess I’m going to have to head back into a lush cave and start digging up a bunch of clay by the time I had that dug up on day 735 I remembered that I need to occasionally bring break my furnes more cuz the

Amount of levels I get from it is just fantastic and now we wait for the clay to cook into terracotta whilst we do that did somebody say uh melon Castle all right let’s do this oh I misplaced that one that’s fine I’ll just use my uh

Where is my axe okay I don’t know what happened here I just somehow lost my axe I ended up spending a minute looking around the islands just searching for it I thought it was in the chest over by the cherry trees where I placed all the concrete and stuff it wasn’t I went

Through every single chest in my storage shack I was so confused where it was till I ended up checking the furnace area and found it in there I don’t know how I accidentally put it in there but there you go anyway I got the melons and

I put them all down and I think one more stack we’ll do it boys one more stack and I have made the melon Castle I wear an extra day but it was day 737 where I had the Terra Cotta cook let me just grab it and oh no that’s really

Bad and thunder great Le like a sleep away the day now on day 738 it might not look like a super big deal to you but the maps that were there were completely ruined and it wasn’t just 300 it was 400 as well basically the maps that I had

Locked in there I didn’t say them cuz at the time I didn’t realize you could actually do that so when they were broken and put into the world they updated so now they’re updated as of day 738 from what I can tell there is no direct way to fix this and there’s no

Way to put them back in without loading them up for the first time as well I did have a quick Google around and found that you could technically change the names of them but you’d have to tamper with the files and stuff and I’m not I

Don’t know about that one it just felt a bit you know sad so I guess I’ll just go and cry in the bathtub and then when I come back I’ll fix the signs and then fix the flooring it was it was a sad to

Behave and I will say that and so on day 739 I got to work on the skin may have left the Terra Cotta behind no bigger definitely not my couple of days I’ll say that much and so I got to work I was planning out pretty much everything that

I needed to do and whilst I was doing that I actually saw some glow squids in the distance I actually still need that if you remember so let me go ahead and kill those boys anyway it was back to work do you want to see a single player

World lag on day 740 well here you go I don’t know what happened here but there it is the good news is this skin is actually really really simple it pretty much which is just a suit the bad news is that I need to get myself more black

Concrete luckily I got plenty in the reserve so I just need to make it and start building it again here is an update on day 741 the arms were completely done there was some powder in the arms and I felt like that added a bit of texture rather than just being

Pure black so I think I’m going to include that a little bit Here There and Everywhere well a little bit later at least I’ve still got more building to do and this was the body done on day 742 we just need to get the head on

There and we are good to go also do you guys see that weird texture with the clouds I’ve never seen that before I got working on the face on day 743 but I did forget about the hair of all things I never actually got myself any materials

For the hair so I’m going to have to quickly stop and go and get some stuff there after getting everything I needed by day 744 I got to work the thing that I will mention about chips’s skin is that his hair is multiple colors of

Round so I did try to mix a concrete terra cotta and wool mixture into the hair ended up deciding that this was a little bit too small and looking at the brown wall I really wasn’t a fan of it so I decided to take that out and I also

Do need to make the head a bit big bigger and here is the final product on day 745 I honestly think it looks pretty good I’m going to just put a couple of signs down and get the advancement glow and behold good stuff good day and with

Another thing ticked off the board on day 746 I started looking at advancements again seeing what I could and couldn’t do and from the surface level I believe there is only seven more advancements I can get without breaking or bending any rules here I’ll let the doctor explain so counting the

Advancements that I had left at this point I believe there was 24 advancements in total but as I just explained not all of them are doable for example I can’t eat every food there’s no way for me to get beef in this world or a more obvious one is smithing wave

Style something that I’ve already complained earlier which requires me to use these eight trimmings which two of them I have zero access to they’re the ones that are basically impossible without breaking the rules there are a couple that I could do by technically bending the rules for example is it a

Bird looking at a pirrot through a spy glass or even adventuring Time by entering every biome there’s nothing stopping me from flying over and then potentially picking up the biome by flying over it or looking at a parad and spy glass as I’m flying over it but that

Still feels like I’m technically using the resources from those lands so I made the decision that I’m not going to do that so what are the seven that I genuinely think I would be able to do during this time well firstly I can get every single cat variant as long as they

Spawn in the village there is a new one which requires you to make a chisel bookshelf and then use some Redstone stuff over it post mortal to die with a totem there is threee that are required with a crossbow and then finally to use an axel to kill something now there

Might be some tricks or ways for me to get other ones here but again I’m confident that these are the only seven that I can potentially get that don’t require me to do any dodgy stuff to get them if that makes sense so for the time being let’s focus on these seven first

Thing to mention is day 747 is that I got myself a new cat I only have three cats to go and we should be good to go and then I did something for the first time that I don’t think I’ve done in about 500 Days and that is to get the

Axel lle out of his cage I headed over to the drown ruin that was on the surface and then I got myself the advancement where an axel and myself kill the drowned and just like that he went back into his cage and he will not leave there probably for the rest of

This video on day 748 I made myself a new bookshelf I also remembered about fa so I got one of the armor pieces done I need 15 more levels to get the other one now to be 100% honest with you I have no idea exactly how to do this bookshelf

Thing so you just oh never mind that was easy you’re back already oh my you must have missed me so out of the seven advancements that I said I could get the those two were easily the easy ones to get the other five are kind of complicated and let me explain as I

Mentioned I do have to tame three more cats which is entirely time and look based there’s nothing to do but wait for the cats to spawn and then tame them the other four are kind of a pain to do and now I could get the double Phantom kill

Now but I like to do all the crossbow ones at the same time that of course requires a Pillager attack Pillager attack would give me bad Omen which means I would be able to kill a Pillager with a crossbow obviously get the bad Omen which would trigger a raay which

Would give me the chance to get a to to of them dying and then of course I can get the Phantom one at the same time as well now it is also worth mentioning earlier I forgot about the advancement hero of the village so that would make

Eight advancment out of a possible 25 so still an extra advancment I could get but again all of this stems down to I need myself a Pillager attack now I am 748 days into this world do you want to know how many times pillagers have attacked me on this world once and I’m

Pretty sure it was in the first 50 days so my chances of this happening are very very slim I will say they on day 700 49 whilst I’m not getting the pillagers my look with the cats is going great another new cat variant and two more to

Go and with that cat done the melon Castle is calling me and after doing my thing with the melons that I had done I had done I had built myself a melon Castle you know what would really finish off this melon castle of course a beacon

What what else do you expect before you comment it by the way at day 750 yes I’m putting in Beacon in a melon Castle so what oh also another meme look at all those chickens nailed it also I’m pretty sure the Strider fell into the water and

Di to rip that guy I guess what an idiot great do me a favor and make sure to cut out this clip of me nearly dying stupidly No Gray I said cut it out gray gray gray so if I’m right I think this is the third if not second time that I’m

Actually in the never killing wither skeletons to get myself a beacon I mean this is probably about the sixth or seventh time I’ve done it in the series so um anybody really want to watch that I’m when is unknown and so an hour pass on day 754 where I got myself the third

Skool nice and then I got myself a fourth school which was really cool and then I got myself a fifth score like what the chances of that the only problem is I now basically out of fireworks I have a solid one so I’m going to have to run back at this point

Using the levels I got on day 755 I got fors free on my boots I can now say if I fully maxed out my gear well as far as I’m aware there is a small problem though I can’t put the beacon in the center of the melon Castle because it’s

An even number so my only real option is to put it in the corner over here now it’s a terrible idea don’t worry I think I’m going to fix it later but for the time being I give you the melon hastle Beacon sure why not I thought on day 756

There is not going to be a problem killing this wh I’ve killed plenty of them it isn’t going to be a problem I I had e the god Apple if I didn’t have the god Apple I would have died I’ll be 100% honest with you but I was able to kill

It I headed back up I made the beacon I changed the Villager Beacon from green to Red cuz obviously the melon one needs to be green and of course it was Thunder of course and day 737 it was a great day I got the melon Castle Dawn and though I

Will probably work on the interior a little later I have officially completed it also decided to put the schulls on here not particularly sure why and then just when this day couldn’t get any better it happened pillagers I am such a lucky boy and only for the second time

In this world just to be clear 750 plus days in I had got myself bad Omen again on day 758 I decided to do it I actually triggered it from very far away I have no idea how I triggered it from over here but there you go now to be honest

With you with the beacons that I had and the gears that I had this pretty much was is one of the easiest raids I’ve done in my entire life the highlight of the whole thing was probably when a ravager is spawn inside of the Axel cage and then started drowning to death that

Was kind of funny but whilst going through this raid I was able to pick up myself five totems of diet which is really good return I would say and just like that there you go hero of the village easy as can be I actually did something else crazy on day 758 I

Actually named my last chest for all three totems I had finally done it I also got the banners added to the house I mean I have enough ominous bannner so that is good to go and then well there was only really one more advancement I

Need and that was to of course kill some Phantom so now we play the waiting game and it was on day 762 or night 762 I would say and here’s the Phantoms I’m not going to lie it took a couple of attempts but there we go we had got

Ourselves the Phantom oh I’m an idiot I never got the freaking Pillager one that was the whole point of that oh my God are you serious oh you’re idiot Haven you’re an idiot how do you make these mistake you’re s you’re an idiot oh my God is it

Thunder all right well good day that was day 763 thanks for watching I won’t show you every day on day 764 but what I will mention every single day I am going over to the Villager the first thing that I am doing to see if there’s any new cats there is

Unfortunately none today but I just wanted to show you that it was happening I also decided than to the creeper among other things that I really need to add some more light to the island so I’m planning on changing now day 765 and I went straight into The Nether I used my

Silk touch a to grab myself a stack of low Stone before heading back the idea was to make these lampost kind of things they weren’t anything special but they’ll do the job I scattered them across the island hopefully to add a lot more like to stop mobs from spawning

What I did notice on day 766 is that you see Chip’s head over there why did I not notice that it was like one too far back I I don’t know why it took me so long to notice that I thought I could easily fix it by basically getting myself a piston

And pushing all one blocks forward the only problem is the inside of the head is hollow so that’s not going to work so I moved on to a Pretty Simple Plan B and that was to remove the back layer and then add a extra layer onto the front

And that should even it out my dog’s just farted and it stinks oh my god let’s try that again um Jesus Christ Jesus Christ is so bad it took most of the next day to get it finished and looking at it it now definitely is

Good to go what I saw a new Trader on day 768 I was about to murder him like I just murdered his llamas but as always I decided to check the trades where I saw that I had myself a jungle sapling and I can’t believe I didn’t notice it but I

Never made myself a jungle island because I’ve never had jungle treat for so after buying and saying thank you for the trees I needed to get myself a few suppling and so I did myself a little bit of bow meal to get myself some extra suppin and for the first time in what

Feels like a while on day 769 I actually went into the caves of course of course I’m not looking for diamonds or Golds I am of course looking for dirt the real man’s treasure looking for me it’s actually quite easy to find dirt down here once you do it’s in giant cluster

So it’s quite easy to get a lot of dirt quite quickly that’s should be enough let’s head home and then on day 770 I started working on the new Jungle Island I was thinking about it as well and apart from the dark oak tree I had now

Got an island for everyone this may be the last time if I don’t get a dark oak sapling or four of them should I say can’t believe all the things I’ve done in this world and I still have got more to do I got myself the base platform

Completed by the end of the day now to work on the underneath area and I had all of the island completed by day 772 well at least the island itself and I need to get the saplings and the grass on that kind of stuff I started cutting

Down more trees I do need to get myself plenty more saplings to actually get on there don’t you just love watching tree leaves Decay it’s like watching paint dry it’s fantastic it was taking too long so I started doing single trees didn’t speed up the process at all I

Spent an extra day cutting down trees who it was on day 774 where I got myself 20 plus saplings I got them all planted I of course planted some sugarcane as well and then I grabbed The Usual Suspects to make myself a bamboo bridge

And I got a start on the bridge on this day but it took me until day 775 to actually finish the bridge I also failed to grow this tree which is no biggie but I can’t believe that happened there was also a random cend the bridge as well no

Idea how he got over here it was unfortunately a duplicate though so no bigger I also then tried to fix on my bow but it did say it’s going to require 33 levels to do that which is just ew and then I checked on the firework Farms

Again the sugarcan farm looking good the G powder Farm oh boy I found topnotch as usual let me just show you how good this is not only is the chest Cher full but literally The Hoppers are also chucker full as well I had to clean up the

Hoppers to actually give this a chance to actually spawn stuff in which is just crazy no to S I need to make myself this Farm every single 100 days that I need iron I finally remembered on day 776 that I wanted to actually build the skin over here completely forgot about that

And I’m not going to lie I was kind of stuck a little bit here all the projects on the board at this point in time I wanted to save until much later in the video and so I didn’t actually have any current projects so actually for the

First time in forever I was just walking around the island aimlessly looking for something to do luckily every single idea I’ve ever had I started writing down so at day 777 I actually came up with a plan to do a big task that I wanted to do ages ago

And that was to kill the Ender Dragon 20 times so let me just quickly pop into The Nether and run through a tunnel then I got lost in a tunnel and then I’ll just quickly get to the end let me show you why you see this thing is called the

End Gateway there is two of them because I’ve killed the Ender Dragon on two separate occasions now the max amount that you can get of these are 20 so I wanted to kill the dragon 180 more times and max out each one of them in the end

But how does one spawn the Eder Dragon 18 times Well to spawn it one time you of course only need four end crystals I assume most of you watching this video know but for the few that don’t this is the crafting recipe for it however I’m not wanting to spawn the Ender Dragon

One time I’m wanting to do it 18 times so I need 4 * 18 ender crystals which just a quick mass for you that’s 72 which means I need to make 72 and crystals which requires 72 eyes ofender which requires 72 gas TI and though that

Might be a bit grander should be easy enough I checked what I had that I could potentially put towards it on day 778 I had 21 blaze rods so that’s 42 powder so we’re halfway there on the blaze rods the easiest thing to have I did actually

Have a couple more blaze rods and two pills here but really no tears and a lot of pills to go uh yeah I guess we’re going to go into the never and start grinding some stuff so I only needed 12 Blaze rolls on day 779 so I didn’t think

That would take long and well it didn’t a whole seven Blazers got me the 12 blaze rods I needed that was the easy one let’s move on to the harder ones next up on day 780 was I needed to get myself about 70 ender pearls and so I

Headed towards the Warped forest and though I had that complete on day 782 another future note for myself stop killing Enderman with fire aspect it is the worst thing you can do they just teleport away just don’t use fire aspect all right let’s move on well there is no

Easy way to do this on day 783 so uh gray do you mind just doing like a gas killing Montage please thank you and even though the last gas nearly killed me in the process I have done it that is 74 gas tiers I realized I got

Two extra but who who cares who cares that should be everything needed to make these end crystals they 792 by the way that took uh what did I start that 781 that take 11 days oh that that that took forever it would have been a lot

Easier if I actually had the elytra but I just didn’t have the elytra cuz obviously I don’t have gun gunun well I have some good P now should have actually been picking up more as I went along all right let’s head home and uh let’s do this I got home by day 793

Grabbed myself some food made myself an anvil because we have a lot of dragons to kill I really need to be careful about oh I can fix my boat quite easily must have find it the wrong way around the first time anyway I do need to get

Myself a tiny bit of sand to make some glass and we are good to go away day 794 and we are ready boys let’s do this this that could have been really bad so this is pretty simple I just need to kill the dragon a bunch of times I was

Averaging about 5 minutes every dragon fight so about four dragons per day and night cycle and so the 799 day I had killed the last dragon and that was Dragon 20 well 18 but it got me to the 20 of dragon kill but just to make sure

This one with the endstone that could be one so 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 give it a second I’m a slow Runner 9 10 11 I think that was 11 12 13 14 15 16 give it a second 17 18 19 and that’s number 20 with obviously that

Being number one we have done it boys we had killed the dragon a solid 20 times so that’s pretty good um all right then I guess that pretty much guesses on 7799 by the way $799 that took uh 5 days that was literally about 5 minutes per Dragon

Kill I would say so right then we have a we have a w to go to probably just have enough time to get the map in so let’s go ahead and do that so you know how it is I got myself four Maps I drew them

All in and we are done compared to 700 it is very similar over than the firework farm and Chip skin yeah there’s very few changes in the map but we are still there and now we’re over 50% done to 1,000 so we still got a long way to

Go so I did take a couple of IRL days off between day 700 and 800 so when I returned on day 800 I was just getting myself reassociated with the world the only real thing I did was I removed the sugar cane quote unquote far from over

Here I really don’t need it anymore and other than that I checked a couple of a good spots just a usual basic day for me but the first thing I had to deal with on day 801 was the fact that I had zero food I’m going to go ahead and grab

Myself some chicken only 10 that ain’t enough I also started putting new ideas on the boards whenever I could think of them and whilst I am doing that I am going to cook up some raw por chops that I’ve had sat around for a while it was

Another day of me walking around so um yeah let’s just skip this day as well the more I looked at the beacon in the melon castle and with day 02 the more realized that he actually looks pretty dumb in the corner I think the new plan

Will be if I can get a second beac them and put them in the front Castle thingies official name I know then i’ have two beams of light shooting up through them and that would look pretty cool it does mean I do need to get a second Beacon though for the time being

I will have to move this one I got the changes done by day 803 I just need to remake the beacon underwater it’s still not fun compared to the first time that I did it but with the beacon done I can now show you my favorite part of the day

The moment where I misplaced this glass not once not twice but three times Isn’t that cool on day 804 after grabbing myself a little bit of extra food I went toward WS an another quick pause though you guys remember when I got those two extra wither skulls from the last time I

Went Wither Skull hunting well at the time I wasn’t aware that that was a thing so guess who’s going to get three extra SKS from the wer when he only needs one yes it be me of course it is turtle’s still hanging out in the nether

By the way is B let you all know I got to the Fortress by date 805 the first skull I got pretty quickly kind of funny to think that I would have been done at this point if I just remembered and it was only the next day on day 806 where I

Got myself the second skull also pretty easy if it wasn’t for the extra hour we shook me to day 809 to get the third SC this would have been quite easy unfortunately that’s not the case waking up back home on day 811 and I saw it the

Two skulls hanging on the side of the old villager Hut and though you can’t necessarily see it you could probably hear it it’s me contemplating life anyway after my existential crisis I went to go and find the weather now the last time I fought this bad boy I had to

Eat a god Apple this time however I have totems and I actually have a smarter plan basically what I’m going to do is I’m going to build a tunnel little spot to spawn him and then I’m just going to spray him down with arrows until he reaches his melee Farm it surprisingly

Went really well like seriously I barely took any damage or things considered and compared to last time it was a cakewalk I should do this more often even if it is the baby way to do it all right let’s go ahead and make the beacon of course

I’m one obsidian short I’m also glass shot how do I not have glass I mean it’s very easy to fix my glass problem and uh oh it’s funded well I guess I’m back to bed so we back into the caves on day 82 I killed a mob and look at this chest

Plate I got I don’t think I’ve ever had a good chain chest plate before but there you go I very quickly mined the one obsidian needed and then headed back up I made the second Beacon and did the very painful job yet again of making the beacon underw water and with that second

Beacon made all is done I got to say it looks so much better with the second beacon in and then started the very annoying process of covering the underwater beacons with melons of course and by day 813 I had the left Beacon covered but unfortunately for the right

Beacon I am out of leavens God I hope we got some spare oh my God yeah I think I’m good and a little bit of melon placing in the be Beacon is covered the melon Castle now has more melons so as usual on day 8814 I went to go and check

Out the village and would you look at that there’s a new cat and best thing is it’s a new cat variant I was going back to get fish and there was another cat in the water and that was also a new variant so I tamed the first cat quite

Easy and when I tamed the second cat that was the last of the 11 I had got myself a complete catalog I got them all in and here’s a little Showcase of all 11 of them are they fantastic I think this is legitimately the first time have

Got this in a 100 days video which is kind of cool actually I might have got it in the advancement well move on on day 8815 I realized whilst I was stirring this stuff away that I think I’m fully done with fish and fully done with melons which is crazy to think

About I’ve been using those things for like the past 500 days anyway something I wanted to do literally years ago is I wanted to make my cooker station a bit more Automatic by simply adding the process of adding these Hoppers and some chests over here I can set myself up a

Pretty simple system so I would never have to re restock this ever again to be 100% sure I even end up feeling it with a bunch of bamboo if I have to refill this by day 1000 I will be seriously surprised I spent day 8816 just cleaning

Up a couple of things there was a couple of things on the island that I wasn’t really a fan of so I just wanted to well like I say clean it up for example the scaffolding that was hanging off of the creeper Farm still not working by the

Way for all four people that care all the caves and cliffs Tower I don’t have an Alanta so this is going to be a bit of an annoying thing the only way I could get up was to do this yeah this is going to take a minute five in fact by

The time we got to the top we was digging back down and it was much quicker would you believe by the time I got down it was the night and it did actually give me a chance to look at the lighting situation on my island did look

Like there’s a couple of spots that I needed lighting like the top of the skull head thingy myob Dr Haven’s classroom also could do with some lights I remember to do that later but it was on day 817 where I came up with something massive what you’re looking at

Is my original house that I dued The Haven house and I would like it to be the Haven Tower basically I want to take this Tower and build it all the way build limit it is going to be massive and so I went up placing the bamboo

Blocks that I have the idea was to place a slab each time I was five blocks off that will show what each individual room will be if I decide to go ahead with that and it did take all day worst part is I didn’t even have enough bamboo to

Actually complete it but you know we’ve at least made a start on it day 818 and just look how high that is it’s not even close to done by the way I also realized I’m going to need a lot of glass and a lot of bamboo to do it and since I have

Next to no bamboo and even less glass this is going to be an awesome time the good news is over time Bamboo will collect itself that’s pretty simple so we just got to figure out the glass situation so it’s time to do some maths I counted that I placed 44 glass on the

Bottom section so it’s going to be 44 glass every single time that I go up the tower will go up 253 blocks and each section is going up five that means there should be 50 sections to The Haven Towers 50 sections time the 44 glass I need per section means I need 2,200

Pieces of glass that’s blocks by the way I I I don’t use pains for some weird reason make it it simple for you that’s about 34 stacks of Glass isn’t that great not even going to talk about the bamboo I need so much bamboo like to try

And speed up the process a little bit I ended up just bone mealing a bunch of bamboo as well it helped a little bit but not a massive amount like the monumentally big test that this will take is going to be crazy for the time

Being let me light up the areas that I saw Darkness on so hopefully that will cover the mobs spawning let me give you a visual representation of date 890 of how much sand I actually need so you see the shulker I need to fill this shulker

To the brain but that would only give me 27 stacks of sand I need this Force Joker and then seven additional stacks of sand to complete my task I also was able to make an additional 51 Fireworks it’s something I guess and well there is no time like the present let’s head out

And dig some sand the plan was pretty simple at day 820 I was going to fly around the ocean and find sections like this which is just on the land and then dig that up it would make it much easier than actually going into the water and

Diging sand directly that would slow me down quite a lot as I dig even more sand at day 821 there might be some of you thinking Haven why don’t you just make like a sand duping Farm or something and in theory yes that could speed up the

Process quite a lot my somewhat weird moral code of right versus wrong makes you think that duping sand or duping items feels a bit cheaty so I’d just rather dig out the sand and got to say is going quicker than I expected it to as well another new area to dig out on

Day 822 after digging and collecting the sand I was actually already done which was surprising I thought it was going to take closer to the 10 days it barely took three all right then let’s head home as I was flying home on day 823 I wasn’t actually paying attention to

Where I was going and I nearly just flew straight by the island that could have been funny and then I started cooking the glass and now listen it’s literally 34 stacks of glass so I’m just going to leave it to do its thing and come back

Later for now let me clear out some extra stuff I some extra sand two by the way I also collected the bamboo at this point I’m just going to leave it in this chest out front and come back to it later the ultimate goal is to just get

As much bamboo as I can before taking this on again so uh yeah I’ll have to come back to that later like I said so on day 824 I’ll be honest with you the the only thing I really did was add a bunch of things to the ball that I

Wanted to do I came up with a cool few ideas that I wanted to do but there is one that stood out to me that I wanted to do straight away I want to kill the warden what I realized on Daye 825 is that I’ve actually never killed the

Warden at least not in the current version of Minecraft I actually killed a warden before he learned the Screech attack in a 1.19 snapshot but other than that I don’t think I’ve ever actually killed the warden so you know it’s kind of scary basically I’m going to brew all

These potions and hope that’s going to help me by the time I was done here was my gear on day 826 I’m just hoping will be enough and I returned back to the ancient city by day 827 right then let’s fight a warden well I got him it wasn’t easy but I got

Him just look he fell in that hole day 828 and I got to say I feel a bit overprepared like look at all these spare potions that I had man maybe I just got to look here I will store them away in the PO chest you never know I

Might be able to use them later for something it did also cost me three tot ofone dying so I guess I shouldn’t buy a gift horse in the mou that’s not that’s all right I should have punch a gift horse in the mouth I think that’s the

Sign well over to the board and changed the sign from Kill the warden to make a warden Monument whatever that means F out the Catalyst that I got from killing the warning will just go into the totem chest no need for that chest anymore let’s be honest I was also looking

Through my advancements again and I realized at this point there isn’t any realistic advancements that I could get without again bending the rules so I can confident Ely say I can scratch that one off the ball the only one I could potentially get is who’s the Pillager

Now but again that would require a Pillager attack which I don’t think that’s going to happen what I will do though is I’ll quickly hover over the ones that I don’t think I can get you’re welcome to look at them and tell me what I could potentially do in the comment

Section below just remember that I record this ages ago so this is all long gone but as I looked through them at the time I was confident enough that I wouldn’t be able to get any of them so yeah there you go day 829 and I realized

That I never bred the sniffers and I always wanted to so I guess I did that now soon those two sniffers are going to be free isn’t that neat also I’m going to sound crazy like I’m pretty sure I’m going to set up a Haven on conspiracy but there’s definitely something weird

Going on with the melon castle like the amount of times I’ve looked over and there’s just been a missing melon from it it’s like only one at a time or something but like melons are moving I don’t know how to explain it maybe the melon Castle just haunted but I don’t

Know I probably just sound crazy on day 830 for the four people that care I am now in version 1.20.1 that’s cool I guess I decided to make this bridge a bit more fancier to the castle and the mob grind grinder so I made myself a

Bunch of slabs and a bunch of walls and I didn’t have enough slabs to complete it and I definitely didn’t have enough walls so I’m going to go ahead and mind myself some extra Cobble and with the Bridge completed on day 831 I began collecting something that I

Never thought I would collect in Minecraft and that is Soul Sand I want to set myself up a basic NE Hub and using Soul Sand actually seemed like the best way for me to do that on day 832 I started building the main Hub area I am

Going to need some extra Nether Bricks so I quickly return to the nether fortress and might a bunch of that out and on day 833 with plenty back I started building let me tell you that this Hub was really really basic it had never what blocks as the floor the walls

Were a mixed of NE bricks and red stained glass the corners were quartz pillars and the roof was well that also forgot to bring in a crafting table so I had to leave and come back so that was fun here’s the completed version on date 834 again basic but I really don’t care

The thing is that was actually the easy part now I’m got to make some paths towards the two locations I want to go to and uh yeah that’s not going to be easy they are both at least 300 blocks away though they are in the same direction so I started building a tot

Towards them with soul s floors so I can run across them quickly before anybody comments why don’t I just use ice I couldn’t think of a way to get ice is the simple as I can give you day 837 and here’s what I’ve got so far starting at

The Fortress you can run across the Soul Sand I will need to make it much safer but at least is to start up until you get to here now up there you can’t get there at the moment I will put in some ladders but up there is the ne portal

That will lead you to the stronghold and following the path back even further you will get back to the main portal pretty nifty right the plan is to make a tunnel basically using this design that I’m showing you here with Ricks and glass on the side and quart slab up top that’s

All I got done by the end of the day for now I’m asleep I carried on working on Daye 838 it was at this point that this task was much bigger than I originally expected it to be I was about 10% done with the overall task and I was

Completely out of resources so yet again it was back to the Fortress to mine more bricks hey with a skeleton of course it drops a skull the first thing I decided to do on date 83 time was to get the rails in over the sides of the bridges

That go over lava so I don’t accidentally falling and die that would kind of suck shout out to the skeleton who took that personally by the way rest in peace help me you shall be missed the most annoying thing about doing this was definitely the mobs getting in the way

All the time like it must have happened four or five times to Me overall but it was such a pain but yet again that was just consistently running out of resources so I kept to go back and grind some more and I’m you know I’m just

Going to skip the grind here here is the completed version by day 845 this trap door leads you down into the main never if I ever want to go in there running through the actual tunnel itself the ladders are now in I’ll just show you up here that this is the main

Portal to the stronghold and again if you follow this path down it’s a very safe path all the way to the ne Fortress it’s clean it’s simple I like it let’s move on though I was thinking on day 846 that I can’t really move on until I make

This as good as possible as you can see my boots currently have soul speed one on them and I was thinking that if I can get Soul speed free I could get through these tunels insanely quickly now there is only two ways to actually get this enchantment which which is bastions and

Bartering so let’s start by bartering I don’t know why I bothered to be honest with you this was a waste of time like usual I literally a stack of gold to trade and they gave me Soul Sand and obsidian I who needs iron nuggets I have

Have you not seen the iron farm my guy you want insult to injuring once they just didn’t give me anything I ended up killing them and they both dropped Soul speed one iron boost which is just it couldn’t be more useless if they tried

To be God I hate them so much and so on day 847 I returned to a long forgot Bastion that I haven’t searched in a very long time the Hope was that I left a soul speed book in one of the chest figure that I never needed it I mean

Let’s be honest what 500 plus days ago why would I need Soul speed I there was definitely some goodies that I left over from the chest during this time unfortunately there wasn’t a soul speed books lucky for me on day 848 there was a second Bastion quite close by and

After heading over and heading to the main room there was actually a book that I left behind unfortunately it was only Soul speed do I originally thought that was quite unlucky until I got really look okay basically I was digging for a new area to find new chest where I found

This enclosed area where I found a chest that had a soul speed one book game by combining the books together I should be able to get Soul speed free pretty easy also got a sharpness five iron sword isn’t that nice by the time I got home on day 850 I started combining turning

This Soul speed one to Soul Speed 3 by the way cost me 42 levels to be fair though look at that speed baby oh yeah play the Sonic music and that is the never h hope 100% completed I finished today by collecting some more bamboo and

Starting one of the towers I may have underestimated the amount of bamboo I actually need for this this is going to be a monumentous task the next task I decided to take up on 851 is I would like to get myself a really easy access

To levels and so I’m going to go and set myself up an Ender Farm the thing is the endal farm that I know unfortunately requires a lot of leaves so I’m going to have to wait a minute and just sheare a bunch of trees until I can get them all

It took an extra day but here we are on day 853 and here’s all the materials that I need the soul speed by the way totally w worth it look how fast I’m going and so I began the Enderman Farm straight away I’ll show you the basics

Like making a pillar to Y Z getting over 100 blocks out building the platforms and stuff it was a slow process but I was just following tutorial again here is the fully completed version by day 856 I do need to make the bridge a bit

Safer but other than that it is good to go let me just say by the way it’s very very loud insanely loud I also don’t think I’m using the right sword for it cuz I’m not getting that many kills I think I need to get C

Or something I decided to make it safer straight away on day 857 I collected a bunch of slabs made a couple of anvils traded a couple of bookshelves and I also wanted to make myself an Enderman murdering sword but I need to get sweeping Edge as I just said

So I am going to have to go and set up a villager to do that at this point in time I didn’t actually have a villager that traded oh never mind there we go day 858 and I got the book that I needed I combined it with the sword that I got

At the Bastion and then I found llamas but I couldn’t find myself a Wandering Trader and then I found him dark oak saplings you say well don’t mind if I do anyway it was back to the end the first thing I did was set up a platform and

Set up an enchanting place do you guys think I have enough anvils I don’t know if I have maybe I should go back and make some more anvils I don’t know I had the safety rails done by day 859 and then I noticed that my enchanted up is missing something quite important

A grindstone so now I have to go all the way back home to make a grind Stone to run all the way back to place the grind Stone very dumb I know I got back on day 8 60 and with the grindstones down I must say the swey edge enchantment that

I P on the sword definitely an improvement like this iron sword is killing at least three times what the never sword was like I was back to 30 levels probably less than 2 minutes this is a great Farm the only problem is actually getting from the Ender Farm

Back home is a serious serious trick like seriously I count it it takes me 4 minutes from when I set off to the Enderman Farm to get back home that’s just too long I need I might want to look at that in the future I was happy

To knock another one off the board on day 861 next up I want to make the dark oak tree island and let me tell you something about dark oak trees obviously as most people know you need four saplings to grow them but if memory serves me well they don’t actually drop

That many saplings from the leaves that they have and that’s why I decided to buy four more and then start farming them I don’t know if they made the changes of 1.20 but they actually did drop a lot more saplings than I expected to by the end of the day after chopping

Trees all day I actually got myself 33 saplings which is a good turnaround and the plan on day 862 was to start the new island unfortunately I only had 27 dirt so point of was my entire day was heading back underground and digging up

A bunch of dirt and so on day 863 I immediately took a bit of a short out here there was some land near the islands already that was quite High to the surface so I decided to just make most of the island on there already it didn’t stop me from making quite a

Chunky Island I’m pretty sure this is the biggest of the islands I’ve made so far but by the end of the first day of building I actually got a decent amount done on day 864 I got the bottom of the island done most of these Island connect

To the floor and like a sort of pile kind of thing this particular one more of like a hangy thing like it’s got a little bit of a Cove underneath it still works for what I wanted to do with it anyway I got the saplings down I began

Lining up the bridge the only problem was I was surprisingly had a bamboo for some reason don’t know how that happened here’s what I did on day 865 was a good day to be fair by day 866 I did have a third of the chest still so

It was actually a pretty good option All Things Considered and now I can actually make this bridge now this bridge was actually slightly bigger than the other Bridges but that’s just the way it would have lined up it would have been stupid if I did it otherwise and the bridge was

Pretty basic to build I made myself some lanterns got them in there and that island is now done there is only one more to go with the m grve let’s hope I get that saing on day 867 with the spare bamboo that I collected during that time

I decided to start working on the third pillars The Haven Towers every time I get the top of one of the pillars by the way and I’m out of bamboo I just realized that I really shouldn’t have made it this big this was a bad idea

Well from one big build to another I decided that I wanted to build a somewhat Warden statue but with the design that I found that I wanted to use I’m going to need a lot a Blackstone so it was back to the Nether and then it

Was to a BAL biome yeah I’m definitely going to be here for a while I need quite a few Stacks day 868 and yeah I definitely got myself quite a few Stacks I also was heading home I stopped and grabbed a couple of warp trees I mean I

Have to use it for the design as well so I’ll definitely grab that the last thing I needed to set up this build on day 869 was a couple of blocks from the ocean Monument but that’s going to be fun so I made my way back over to it forgot about

This villager in the middle of the water don’t worry bro I’ll come back for you at some point once I was there and minding up the blocks I made a terrible Discovery I thought I need prismarine blocks it turns that you need dark prismarine blocks and the only way to

Make that is with black dye and eight prismarine shards that would give you one prismarine block I need over three stacks of it it would probably take me over a 100 days just to get these blocks to the amount that I needed anyway so I decided that I’m just going to move on

To plan B and make a new design and I got one now you might be wondering why is it day 873 and the simple answer was I wasn’t recording collecting the materials I need for it somehow this this is Gray’s fault I don’t know why so

Come on Gray do better well it was time to work for the most part this build was just a pixel art of the warden’s face and then I was going to put something in front of it to symbolize the Catalyst but uh for the most part I was just copy

And pasting from another YouTube video here is the completed version half an hour later or day 876 it’s not what I originally wanted but to be honest with you I actually think it looks pretty good and now for the Catalyst now if it’s up to me this

Thing is never going to see fresh air again in its entire life so it keep it caged down here and that is the warden Monument done let’s just clear out my inventory and clear that off the board and we are done for the day I haven’t

Really mentioned this yet but in day 877 I just want to let you know that it’s a really good feeling to knock something else off of the board like these are all big tasks so knocking them off one by one was definitely a satisfying thing to

Do well another bamboo trip up into the sky was on the cards up I go and yet again I’m out now this jump was definitely completely unnecessary and I didn’t realize at the time that I didn’t actually have a totem in my off hand so that could have been really really dumb

But but you know too much of a Pro Gamer to die like that the next task up I want to get myself some Banner patterns still here by the way just deide my office and banner patterns are a preset pattern that you can get in Minecraft that you

Can apply to banners I guarantee 99% of you have never used one though it appears that there’s two extra versions in Bedrock There is five versions that you can get in Java Edition there is the snout version that you can collect in bastions the thing version which you can

Craft using a god Apple the skull version which you can use crafting a Wither Skull the creeper version which you need a creeper skull for as well shocker I know and the flower version which you need an oxide Daisy for starting this challenge I already had

The creeper and Wither Skull so that was easy I have also picked up a snout pattern along my time so that was also pretty good the other two is going to be a massive pain to do but I’ll come back to that in a second this may also be the

First ever time that I’ve used a loom in Minecraft at least to my recollection and uh well let’s just say that uh I didn’t know what I was doing here day 878 and once I knew what I was doing I made the free banners straight away the

Other two banners I need well here we go so as I mentioned I need either a god apple or an oxide Daisy to actually complete this and both of them are pretty hard to do Under the current circumstances when it comes to getting a god Apple the only reasonable way I

Could do it is to go back to one of the ancient cities I’ve found and hope that there’s still a god Apple sat around there that I have to find a new agent city which is just such a difficult task however I still think that would technically be easier than actually

Getting the oxide Daisy Unfortunately they only spawn in biomes like Plains and flower Forest so unfortunately Beach and oceans they just don’t want to spawn in for some weird reason even if you’re bone meal so the only choice I’ve got is wondering Traders have a chance to trade

Them but uh that’s a very slim chance to say the least so getting either of these two by the end of the Thousand day is definitely going to be a difficult task well uh give it a go though for now I’m just going to focus on the bamboo as you

Can see on day 879 I have a lot of Bones to go through and I can’t really think of another reason why I would need bone or bone meal so I’m just going to S here for a while and I’m pretty much just going to bone meal all the bamboo I ended up

Adding more popper my C underneath so actually collect more up as well I’m going to be 100% honest with you from this point for the next hour or so I pretty much just stood here and held right click the only time I looked at my screen was to replace the bone meal

Otherwise I was on my phone I was looking at something else I was just trying to get as much bamboo as possible after an hour had passed on did 885 and this was the bamboo that I got and boy was it quite a lot all of the work that

I put in for seven stacks of bamboo blocks I wasn’t even 100% sure if it’d be enough but I’m willing to give it a go well up I go again on day 886 down with a water bucket so we went up and got to the first Sky limit on one of the

Builds and then I did something really Dumb that immedately could have gone better well up we go yet again all right then take Two man I just suck at this the thing is that was technically the small jumps now let’s do the big one nailed it and up we go one more time all right you know we hit the third one that was the impressive one let’s just

Move on I wish I’d tell you that my big brain knew exactly how much bamboo blocks I needed this was the exact perfect amount I needed to get all four pillars to Sky limit I’m completely out of bamboo at this point and again I really wish I told you that I did that

On purose I did not didn’t need to risk the jump again but we move on the thing that I remembered on day 887 is that the pillars were only part of the puzzle I still need so much more bamboo for the actual walls and it did also remind me

That all the glass would have now cooked so I collected it all decent amount I would say also I got myself some better snacks I really wanted to upgrade from these terrible caros all the AG day 888 and you know what the dark Oak Island is missing it is missing big mushrooms and

So I needed to go and get myself some now I was checking out my storage area it looks like I did have a brown mushroom sat around but I didn’t have any red ones for whatever reason I guess there’s no reason for me to click red

Mushroom you get the point and so I went back into NE haunting for red mushrooms did I expect it to take me 45 minutes to find red mushrooms absolutely not but here we are on day 890 collecting the red mushrooms I got back home by night I

Got a single stack of Bones left over and they got lucky with that one I thought I used them all and well let’s get them down the red mushroom was as easy as can be the brown one it just didn’t want to work I don’t know why I

Just decided that it didn’t want to do it I tried waiting until the night to get it to work hopefully I get some more darkness in I might be able to grow it and I got there in the end but it was much more annoying than it should have

Been day 892 and it was map day it’s a bit earlier than I was planning to but I had a big plan coming up so I wanted to do it early I got the four Maps recorded I did have to collect a little bit of cherry logs because obviously I wanted

To use that for the board and I literally had Aro somehow and this was the 900 day board the warden kind of looks funny on the map I will say that you can definitely tell there’s a new island down there which is pretty cool you also tell that something is

Happening to the main Haven house hopefully it’ll become more noticeable of the Haven Towers in but yeah that’s all I did for now and then for the big decision on day 893 I really want fir works again so what I’m going to do is I’m going to AFK

Up top and wait until at least 900 days which should be close to about 2 and 1/2 hours hopefully that will spawn some more gunpowder in I guess we’ll check on day 900 and we’re back day 900 here we are uh still in the skies I’m hoping for

The love of God we actually got some uh gunpowder that’d be nice I’ll be honest with you I’m technically on a different day right now uh real life day I sort of left my game playing and then turned it off to to play another day so I don’t

Really know how good or bad this will be um I’m hopeful though cuz I really miss the ability to fly around here we go that’s that’s not a lot I’m not going to lie that’s not a lot I left it for about nearly 3 hours that’s not a lot

Yikes why is this door gone what happened to the door where’s your creeper what is happening I have I just lost the door what happened in a couple of days that I’ve been gone no I just don’t have a door anymore all right whatever I don’t really need one so

Looking at the board uh we have 1 2 3 4 5 six tasks of available for me to do I think that these six tasks I will be able to do them all the next 100 days I’m hoping Haven Towers won’t be too bad but that’s just entirely dependent on

Bamboo so we’ll check that out in a second the banner pans might be a bit of a pain as well but I can roughly remember where I found asan CI so I’m going to see if I can get those I guess we’re just going to start doing stuff

And taking from there where we are in 900 days I have done so much like I can compare that to the 100 day board it is crazy how much is actually on this board there’s still more space do stuff I can do stuff over here why is you don’t have

Among Us I’m going to fix that quickly and back in but this this is it this is the final stretch we have 100 more days to go and then this this world will have been alive for 1,000 days which is crazy to think about I do have some big tasks

Before then so let’s get straight into it the first thing I did on 901 was check how much bamboo I had and yeah it was a decent amount I turned it all into planks and then used other kinds of wood to make a bunch of ladders the plan was

To make a ladder system that went all the way way up to the top it would make it so much easier to get up and down and build the rest of the Tower and yet again did not have enough bamboo to make it all the way to the top so that was

Fun and going down with ladders like this yeah I would never recommend it for any of you so I think we can agree on day 92 that under normal circumstances I’m never going to get enough bamboo to complete the tower and so I decided that I’m just going to personally speed up

The process how am I going to do that simple I’m going to use bone meal I didn’t have any bones at the time though but the never is right there and the Never does have bone blocks so that’s going to be pretty good to I spent 3

Days never collecting bone blocks I had collected a grand total of 11 stacks at this point I was hoping that that surely should be enough for me and when I got back on day 96 I started bone mealing all of the bamboo it was very loud and

So I muted my game so y y you’re ready for this day 910 been a good uh 45 minutes since I started this decent amount of bamboo I would say not too bad you know pretty pretty good old things considered um what’s that it’s like 27

28 29 30 31 32 with more bamboo flowing in because there they’re just chucker full from 10 stacks of bone blocks that’s that’s a decent amount but if you think that’s all I’ve got here’s a here’s a little here’s a couple of chests and uh yeah decent amount B in

There and a decent amount of B there and 10 stacks of bone blocks are pretty much half built the Haven Tower I would say so it’s a definitely a good start it’s also good to know that if I ever want to I can just um bone block it up and then

Get enough so now it’s really going to be a case of building so uh I guess we can get to work finally so let’s make some more bamboo and then let’s make some B bamboo after that I’ll make some more bamboo and uh well bamboo 16 stacks

Of bamboo blocks later and let’s see what we can do first things first let’s get the ladders finished off and I carried on working on the tower on 9911 don’t do it don’t don’t make the joke we all thought of it just don’t do it and with the ladders now completed well

Technically I was free sh but that’s really not an issue I wanted to place at least one block on each level to show where the floors are supposed to be and boy was that fun by the end of the day I did just that so we can now actually

Start working on the floors themselves so a little bit of a showcase on day 912 and how exactly I’m doing it leaving a 4×4 in the middle So eventually I can put some glass in I added some bamboo to the bottom layer of each floor before

Adding two layers of glass to the wall to make a wall pattern that looked like this every single room from here to the sky limit will look exactly like this and I’m not going to show all of that instead so we’re going to have to do a building Montage [Applause] [Applause] so look look how far we’ve come look how far we still have to go and look how little bamboo that I have I have one slab all of that work all the bone mealing and I don’t have enough bamboo I don’t even know if I’d have enough glass

Now that I look at it because I’ve still got to go up I mean I counted out the glass I’m surprised I won’t have enough glass it’s a Monumental test to say the least and after going up for what day are we currently on 9916 so we been

Doing this for the last 4 days um yeah kind of concerning that I may have to get more glass and I may have to get more bamboo cuz the thing is I still don’t have the flooring in I guess I could Mass it out and work out exactly

How much bamboo I need but then the flooring and stuff this this I don’t know why I decided to do this it was a cool idea at the start but now here I am after bone mealing literally 12 stacks of bone block and I am probably still

Going to need a solid 10 stacks of bamboo this is going to be awful anyway let’s do some maths so there’s 25 blocks per wall needed they’re both two blocks high so I need obviously two so that’s 50 per section there’s 30 sections left that I need to do which means I need

Myself 1,500 bamboo blanks there’s also 58 sections that I need for the floor 30 pieces of wood per floor so that makes another 1,740 planks needed in total I need 3,240 bamboo planks to complete this or about 50.5 stacks of bamboo planks I don’t regret this at all this was a good

Idea I did more maths on day 9917 on screen is exactly how much bamboo that I needed to give you an idea of how much that is this double chest has 54 Stacks I need to fill that four times and I still wouldn’t even have enough is the

Towel looks kind of cool and it will only look cooler once I get it done the plan was to get straight to it I made as much fireworks as I could it was only three stacks but it was going to be a lot better than just running around the

Nether and then I returned to the Nether and started bone block mining away again and by by the end of the fourth day I got myself 15 stacks of bone blocks which was definitely a good amount I was going to go a little bit further but not

Too much since my firework Reserve was going to run out pretty soon and I really didn’t want to get stuck in here on day 922 and I feel like we’ve been here before repeating the same thing over and over again hm guys ever seen Groundhogs Day you know when I saw this

Adventure I didn’t think that when we got to the 900 day mark it would turn so grindy and yet it seriously has so we’re now on day 928 we’re actually about half we’ve done a decent amount uh and as you can see it’s got like no bamboo in it

That’s because uh I’ve got all this bamboo and I got all that bamboo and I got all that bamboo and I got all that bamboo and I got all that bamboo and I got glass nice what I’m planning to do is if I just have all the items on the

Floor I could just do this ah didn’t think this bit through immedately it’s fine don’t worry give me a second there’s so much bamboo on the floor then let’s try this again no you why did you do that God damn it this this this plan worked better in my head just want to

Make that clear to everybody involved let’s try this again so much bamboo you again okay right we’re going to go to PL be here this has not worked out how I wanted it to if I’ve done the maths right they should be enough I worked out that I

Need 25.3 blocks of bamboo to get this done this is about 27 so there should be enough bamboo to complete this just open I’ve got enough glass uh I think I do oh is open anyway 929 is here and uh great great just just do the [Applause] Thing and we are up top so pretty much I’m fairly confident with the bamboo will be good I haven’t done the walls um just because feel like it be easy to just go up with the walls when the time comes but I do have pretty much all the

Bamboo all need I’m fairly confident that’ll still be enough of bamboo so now what we got to do is get enough glass to fill all these Center four in and then get enough glass to go all the way up so I’m afraid I’m going to have to go ahead

And do some maths again oh boy who would have thought our Minecraft video would be so educational with math so I counted 19 walls that still needed glass and 54 floors that’s still needed glass to the four glass needed per floor that’s 216 glass the 52 walls that’s an additional

988 which means I still need 1,24 pieces of glass or nearly 19 Stacks worth as I finally fixed my bow that was going to break any day now anyway let’s fly around and get ourselves some glass found a nice little place to start digging and so I did and then on day 935

I did a little bit mod again and on day 936 I might have gone overboard a little bit but that’s fine we can finally fly home start cooking away it is definitely going to take a minute so whilst I am waiting I am going to go ahead and trade

A bunch of iron why that’s that’s a good question why did I want the village TR what was I just about to do why am I here what was I about to do I was about to do something why am I here with emeralds what was I about I don’t know

What I’m doing here all right well I guess we’ll scrap that plan I get a clue oh I remember what I want to do oh my god I’m an idiot I remembered I wanted wool and quite a lot of it and trading iron and melon seemed like the

Most simp way to do it the only problem was they was maxing out really quickly so I’m going to have to find a new way to do this so I started trading with as many farmer villagers as I could on day 937 I bought so many apples I was

Getting PTSD from the first 100 days the problem wasn’t the emeralds I had plenty of that it was just the fact that I was consistently stuck with one Traer of white wool and so every single time I was just maxing him out and then I was

Just having to wait for him I could trade 16 at a time so to give you an idea of how long this was taking by day 940 I only had three stacks of white wool I also finally added the final enchant to my sword sweeping Edge now I

Can officially say all my gear is maxed out on enchants rest in peace all those levels though I mean cost a lot so anyway it was finally time for me to build my boy and so I got to work so I got back to work on day 941 and before I

Knew it I was out of WM yeah this is definitely going to take a while so I began trading pretty much St away problem is I just couldn’t be bothered to wait around again so my plan was kind of simple what I’m going to do is I’m

Going to max out the trades the best I could and then I’m going to go ahead and build a little bit on the wall guy after that I’m going to head back to the Villager and hope that the trades are done and keep going back and forth until

I’ve actually completed my build spiler alert it was a very painful process but here is the finished product on day 943 a wolfy boy I can’t tame a wolf so I may as well build one I shall call him Paxton call him Paxton now it’s somebody

Will get that joke trust me now with all this cook glass I should be able to finish off the tower so over the time being gray Taj you open for the last Time and from crazily underestimated it to honestly crazily overestimating it I ended up with over two stacks of bamboo spare and over two stacks of glass spare as well I don’t know how I did that but way we move on but the Haven Tower is done mostly you see these little slabs

Now basically I just want to get them going all the way around so that’s going to be a bit of a pain but that is the last thing that I have to do 3 days into this project by the way and uh we’re still not done anyway let’s finish this So that’s the first world done has the front W done um took me about 15 minutes I would say so if we’re taking 15 for here 15 for here 15 for here and 15 for here and this is the next hour of my life cool um well no time like the

Present wait is this the water side wa is the war side I should be more careful about doing that even though I have the to like seriously I just have enough bamboo to do this but we’re done that’s all four sides don’t I believe let me just quickly check so this side is good this side is good this side is definitely good yep and and of course this side is good fantastic all right

Then that’s all four of them done that took an hour yeah imally wasn’t too bad um I no longer have to touch bamboo or glass for a very long time and I’m very appreciative of it right then I think that I’m going to go ahead and stop building this we’re in The Final

Countdown of 50 days I believe the water is this side probably should have been more careful definitely should have been more careful but what I can do is first off make a wolf and dunzo and then Haven Towers is also dunzo so there’s only three really things I want to do the

Battle Pann I don’t think I’m going to have time so we’re going to get rid of that one now and that one’s fine but uh Hall of Haven got to build that that’s just going to be a monument to the island the Minecart Track SL monor rail

That’s probably going to be the next big thing I work on and the mangrove Island entirely depends on a wondering TR is spawning in but I’m going to be 100 honest with you I just don’t think that’s going to happen at this point so uh next up let’s check our quartz

Situation so it was day 952 where I went back to the never to mine some quartz and believe it or not that’s what I did when I got in there to be 100% honest with you thanks to the fortune among other things this was actually quite an

Easy Adventure I I pretty much half filled the Sher by the end of the day and by the end of day 953 I had filled the Sher completely very easy stuff I began flying home but as you can see I have now run out of fireworks so I’m

Going to have to run back it wasn’t really that much of an issue or anything I did also run out of food at this point so it was definitely a good time to go like quits lucky for me day 954 food is something I had plenty of look at all

That chicken again somebody will get that also there’s holes in the melon Castle again why does this keep happening I’ve actually looked into it melons don’t Decay what what’s going on here this day originally would have been a r off but then it happened pillages I could actually get the advancement that

I wanted to and after getting who’s the Pillager now I went through the advancements one last time and I can confidently say that I have got every single advancement that I can get without bending any rules so U look at me so I wasn’t thinking much on day 955

And I accidentally triggered a raid I’m going to be honest with you though this raid couldn’t be less scary if it tried I ended up just spawning a bunch of iron gols and just letting them deal with it it did knock off the right side to the

Maps on the 300 day board it was already broken but that just made it worse somehow also who do you think is going to win this fight seven iron golems or one Vexy boy oh it was the it was the Golems H seen that one take the free TS

By the way what I realized on day 956 is that the amount of times that I’ve actually just looked around my for just a new spot to build something what add up to about 20 days at this point I look around so much but the plan was to start

My new build here and I’m going to build a monora rail ring around the island so you remember that Shuler that was full of water I was planning to use that to make a rail all the way around the bottom as well as making a sort of

Killer thing underneath it so it like goes all the way around the problem was after using all the quarts I only got about halfway done so that’s uh that’s not good I realized I was wrongly one day 956 turns out I only used half of

The quart at this point so I was able to get back to work I could have done it quicker but I was really worried about overshooting it so what I decided to do was basically start again at the stop but go the other way around that way I don’t accidentally misline something but

Anyway I got the main ring completed though I am pretty much out of quart at this point falling in the lava was a bit unnecessary admittedly and as I was typing up some notes there was an iron go being in the background pretty much sums up 956 and I have spoken G

957 and I think I have enough rails if I do say so myself so I started working on placing rails and just like that I am out of rails definitely underestimated how many I need the good news is though I have a little bit of spare iron just

Just a couple of pieces here or there took me until day 959 to finish the railing now I can move on to putting down some powered rails the plan was to put the rails on each of the corners and hope that that would be enough to push

Them through but I also thought if I put them in the middle as well just to give them that extra push that should be enough to get them through as I say I will need more course to actually put down the pillars underneath it to actually make it look like it holding

Itself up but for the time being I will at least finish the rails and it was on day 960 where it was finally time to test out the rail system it was mostly fine but I could definitely tell the longer sides of the rail definitely need

More powered rails cuz I was running out of steam towards the end I can do that in a second for the time being I really need to get some more qu so I returned back to than ever it was by day 962 where I was able to fill out another

Shuler that should definitely be enough to do as much as I want to do and so at day 963 I went around placing the power rails this time hopefully it will be enough if I put them in the right locations it immedately was quite a slow

Process but when I tested by the end of the day I definitely say it worked like a charm well almost I think I need one more booster towards the end of the Railway but over than that it should be good to go and now of the booster on day

964 I’m fairly confident it will work now when I next test it the last thing to do to complete this monor rail was to add the pillars underneath the powered rails so I got to work the last rail was done by day 966 it’s time for a test ride right then

Let’s go for a little bit of a ride so what you do is uh firstly you turn down the game cuz it’s very loud uh but you just just press that button and it takes you around you can have a good nice outline of my Island and once you get

Past the but of chips just ignore his but obviously you have each of the islands and all there grown that’s kind of what’s going on over here I like the jungle I feel like the jungle island has come across quite well I must say disappointed didn’t get Mangrove but I

Mean what can you do at this point up next you see villager Isle there’s the knit with that I got all the way on day I don’t even know like 60 my God remember when I had that guy that was totally fun honestly I don’t even know

Why I put like bookshelf things down for they’re not bookshelf Le turns down for them that was kind of not my smartest move but you know what can you do you see the boat of the dog the melon Castle to the right you’ve got the warden statue Monument thing and the completely

Totally working mob grinder the semi-auto farm that and since I’ve built much more efficient ones I realize how terrible it actually is I’m pretty sure there’s still a sunk there sunk ship like right there I got that ages ago now feels like an eternity since I first got

That then you have the automatic AIS so you’ve got the suar Farm there you’ve got the um the creep quote unquote creeper Farm you have uh the iron farm there’s the multi-layered beacon there’s the chicken farm there and as we approach the last Corner you’ll have Dr Haven’s uh School his classroom and

Obviously the lava piton for the the um what do you call them Strider there you go Strider among other things honestly good addition I’m really really grateful I did it the only thing is I don’t know how exactly I would do it I guess I

Could put a no cuz then he just takes you on and you just keep going obviously I don’t want to do that though so oh no I want you and with that done on day 966 with the sun halfway through the day and that is one of the last two big

Tasks that I want to get done on this island in fact I only have three tasks left obviously you’ve got the monor Royal mine cart track I can now officially get rid of that all together God this is a good day uh Mangrove Island let’s be honest the chance of me

Getting another wandering trade that also has the mangrove sapling I don’t think will happen at this this point so it may be the only task that I will be able to do which is kind of sad but considering everything else that I’ve done on this island I can’t really be

Sad about that I mean seriously you can’t look anywhere on this island without seeing something new and cool so that’s kind of cool and then finally Hall Haven I had this on the board for a very long time probably some people like what the hell is the Hall of Haven

Basically I just want to build like a I don’t even know the correct term for it but like a monument to every accomplishment I’ve done and put down some cool statistics that I’ve you know had during the time just basically like a final celebration for for everything

That I’ve done because you know in the next couple of hours they done all of this work all of this recording all this this will be the last time I go on this island and that’s it’s in a way it’s been a sweet cuz obviously you know I’ve

Done a lot on this island and the next couple hours it’ll be done so I guess once the new day hits cuz the sun’s about to he you can look past the giant Tower and we’ll start the Hall of Haven now where we going to build that oh God

We’ll have to spend a couple of days figuring that out day 967 and it was time for the the final build and we need to make ourselves something fancy so I started by using the remainder of the quarts I had to make myself a nice floring I then began planning it out

Making sure it was an odd number because I wanted a center block it was on to the walls on day 968 I used dark oak for the first time cuz I’ve never used that in this world and though I did have to do a little bit of reworking cuz I

Accidentally miscounted one of the lengths I was able to extend it and keep on working I will say on day 969 it’s so much easier just use glass pain you get so many of them and it’s just so much easier play this was a joy I’m so

Grateful I never have to place glass blocks again my God so day 971 and uh here’s the roof yes it does look awful I’m not pretending it doesn’t but I do actually need it to look like that because I need to hi myself a sign let’s

Uh let’s get some iron blocks and I introduced to you the completed build of the Hall of Haven it’s not great but I think it works I just really wanted to fill it up with some interesting stats that I was able to do across the time

That I was here I was still adding stats by day 973 it was actually kind of fun to go through and look at some of the statistics that I was able to pull off during this time the legitimate last thing that I wanted to do was just to

Get a beacon and put it in the Hall of Haven so for the absolute last time let’s run into The Nether and get ourselves some wither skulls I’m going to skip this process cuz we don’t need to see it again but here we are on day

973 where I got not one but two wither skulls getting me to four wither skulls which I thought was pretty cool well it’s time to head home I did get a little bit of distraction on day 980 but I was able to fight the Wither I used

The same tactic as last time by shimming him in a cave and then just spraying him down with arrows as soon as he got close to me I just spammed him with my sword he barely did any damage to me I mean even whilst I was AFK and typing notes

Here he still was doing damage but I was never going to die here not even close the greatest thing I have realized on day 981 is there’s going to be a day very soon where I won’t have to build a beacon underwater and let me tell you

It’ll be a good day and then something happened that I genuinely never expected I ran out of iron blocks I cannot believe that happened whatever will I do to fix this problem let’s just see if I have any iron in reserve oh look I do

Who who do see that one coming and just like that the whole of Haven was completed day 982 and there was just a handful of things that I wanted to do before the ending like put a couple of walls around the hall add a couple of lanterns there put a couple of extra

Things in the Hall of Haven those kind of things and it was a bit of sweet feeling on day 983 cuz this was the legitimate last thing that I was going to do I made four Maps one more time I obviously recorded the map locations I

Made the final map board and it was done doesn’t even fit the monitor by the way which is kind of crazy and I do know it is 17 days early but I legitimately just was done I didn’t want to force anything out I didn’t want to add something that

I wasn’t going to life so I was pretty happy to just wait until the end but we’re not done here there’s two more things we need to do so for the last time ladies and gentlemen let me introduce Dr Haven and last time over here ehh well don’t be too sad people

I’m sure I’ll pop up in other videos when needed for now it is my final lesson of the Survival Island video so pay attention make note this is going to be the final one my final lesson to you is the seed of this world but before I

Can give you that let me just quickly take a nice little field trip does this place look familiar no well let me just fly up here now it definitely should this is the island that I have survived 1,000 days on or the thumbnails from every single video now when I started

Here I believed that there was no wood on the island so I spawned in one bamboo to use the new W to basically make a very unique experience on Survival Island you can do that alternatively you don’t actually have to because it turns out there is a sunken ship right off the

Side of the island here you can use the wood from the sunken ship or go into the sunken ship and get the Moss basically I’m saying that if you want to use this world you don’t have to use the bamboo way that I did I just did it cuz I

Didn’t think I had any other access to Wood you can just use that the final little note that I want to give about this world is that though it does work on both Java and Bedrock there are slight differences I’ve been playing in Java so let me just quickly show you the

Bedrock version if you were to play in Bedrock then you actually get a desert temple over here it is worth mentioning though that if you do play in Bedrock the Shipwreck isn’t there which means you wouldn’t actually have any access to wood so good luck if you are wanting to

Do it that way ah back in the office that’s so much better but that’s enough Jibber jaring here is the seed now I know some of you have been waiting a very long time to see this seed so thank you so much for watching this entire series and waiting up until this moment

And I do have a favor to ask before you run off and play this world if any of you decide to make content on this world basically make a video or a series or something do me a favor and leave @ Haven and your YouTube description it’s

Not because I want the credit I don’t care about that but basically when you put a Haven and in your description it will notify me on YouTube that you have made the series and I would love to watch some of you guys’ content on this world The Haven and survival island

Challenge which I’m going to dub it selfishly was a really cool thing for me to do and whether you start with one bamboo or just the Shipwreck it was such a fun experience and I’d love to see other people give it a try so like I say

Notify me on YouTube leave that at Haven and it’d be really cool fair warning though it is challenging and that ends my final lesson I thank you all so much for listening to the lessons that I’ve given you along the way sign is off Haven s is off day

999 we have one more day in this world so I think now of all times would be the perfect time to do one last Island Tour God where do I even begin the reason I’ve done this on 9999 by the way I’m not even confident I’ll be able to look

At it all so I guess we will start on the far side of the island and we will work our way forward but there’s a lot to get to here so get comfy you can watch The Haven tour one last time starting with the multiple Islands the

Jungle the dark oak you’ve obviously got the alacia there’s the oak uh cherry tree of course over here you have our I have a chest over here oh my God I could have used some of this stuff no whatever I potato chips skin is right here congratulations to him yet again that

Pretty much is all of the islands the grass over here didn’t complete which I mean to be fair I’ve not really been over here that much but it is still a bit of a surprise cuz I have stood around this island a bunch very surprised it didn’t fully grow out but

That’s pretty much all the trees and everything obviously got aelier Island there’s spruce tree island there’s birch tree island I’m so disappointed I didn’t get the mangrove tree for the record I would have got every single one of them that would have been really cool but uh

H what will be what will be the mine cart I’ll do that last cuz I feel like that’s the the best uh thing to do last so we can have one last Loop Round over here we have some nice places first of all King Pedro oh my God how long have I

Had you for it feels like an eternity since I had you know King Pedro come to my Island and stay and own his little plotter land the sniffers I got in the first I was going to say first 100 days it was in like the 500 days but they feel like

They’ve been here forever now I mean kind of crazy villager Island remember when there was all stuffed in this house and now they’ve got look at how many kind Golems they’ve got what is this there like there four five 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 there’s 39 golems in here guys

Again he ought to be safe there’s four teeth there what the hell but yeah this is a I always thought I’d make this a little bit prettier at some point but I just never really got the chance to do it so uh you know what it it it does

What it’s supposed to do of course you have Among Us in the corner over there I still love that build but one of my favorite builds I must say hello Paxton how you doing buddy it’s really hard to get a good look of him but I actually

Quite like the way he looks I’m not going to lie I think it looks really cool you have of course the map room this is every map from day 600 when it was uh you know from 600 that’s where we were and then 700 and then 800 and then 900 and here’s where

Finished on day 1,000 look how much is on the island wait until I show you day 100 and just how little there was I really wish I could get a map of just Day Zero that’d be kind of cool but like look how much is on here there’s not

Like a space of land that is just free it’s it’s kind of crazy over here you’ve got the uh villager area with all the trades I only ended up using it a couple of times but it still was a useful get hello Cat Land how’s it going you know

What that logo the cat the way it’s sort of set up that’s actually kind of grown on me quite a lot I actually quite like it but here’s all 11 cats 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 yep all here uh the black hat

I’ve looked into Forever by the way incredibly look to get that one it would have been absolutely like if I got 10 of the 11 I would have been like yeah that makes sense this only spawns at midnight and there’s only like a one in if I read

Correctly like one in 50 chance of it being a midnight kind of thing so I got very lucky that I spotted him the next day like incredibly lucky obviously you’ve got the melon farm which might probably could to be chucker yeah it’s completely chucker yeah there’s loads of

Stuff in here it’s probably like backed up like crazy cuz I haven’t touched it since I completed the melon Castle actually that’s not true I grabbed the bit to do some training but that was still ages ago you got the dragon statue yeah I mean there’s not really what to

Say about it I do think it’s an upgrade to what it originally was oh the to-do board I never crossed this off so the Hall of Haven is gone you know what the mangrove Island he can stay there cuz he the only thing I wasn’t able to get done

It’s unfortunate but what can you do obviously my giant person my human now I have noticed and I imagine some people are going to comment saying that the head is one block too forward like do you know remember how I did with potato chips’s skin how his head was one too

Far back mine is one too far forward it just such an effort to like change it though it literally took me 20 minutes to fix potato chip his face is really basic man has the goggles and the mustache and those kind of things it’

Just be a real pain to fix it of course you’ve got the melon Castle I didn’t even end up going for the flags cuz I just didn’t think I’d be able to get them I mean I definitely wasn’t able to get the oxide Daisy one but uh the the

God Apple in FY I probably could have got it was just a lot of effort to T to find a third one and trust me I am very very tired doing all the stuff this thing is the bane of my existence so we’ll ignore it the warden Monument the

Warden that I killed the catalyst is still down there protected never to see the light of day I guess it is cuz the glass but you you get the point I don’t really show this but as I’m running back I’m just sat here silently just waiting

For like the next thing to do you’ve got the maps this is the day 100 map by the way I mean if you ignore the among as accidentally took that out at one point but there wasn’t anything there apart from whatever this little thing is actually might be the bottom of the mob

GR gr it but again he’s fine but like look how little is there he had my house some Farms the bamboo that was the pig that red dot there that was the pig step area and I don’t even know what that was I don’t even know what that is maybe

It’s the enchant setup it probably is the enchant setup actually and 200 days I did did I put no that’s not right that’s definitely yeah that’s definitely wrong okay 200 days is wrong that’s fantastic to look at 300 days is definitely wrong we know this and so is

400 Days I’m really disappointed these Maps broken by the way 500 Days is correct but apparently 200 days is broken as well I don’t know how that’s happened but 200 days is also broken so um isn’t that fun I don’t know when that got broken so the only the only working

Maps I have is day 100 day 500 and then obviously the ones that go up to 1K but to be honest with you this one being the the free one is fine and if I want I can go through and get screenshots of every one of them and put them together so

That’s fine uh the auto cooker I Will Show You by the way I still had so much cooking like stuff done so I was never ever going to have to refill i l there four stacks of coal in there so we fine we thought we were good the Tower of

Haven it goes all the way to y320 I’m going to be honest with you after not after this floor there is nothing up there there’s absolutely nothing like I could go through every FL there’s also that which I kind of missed there’s just nothing I just wanted to have it I don’t

Know why I thought if I had enough time I could like design each floor but I just never got the chance to do that so of course you have the skulls I really happy I got all these especially this one this one was a pain but yeah these

Were quite nice and easy to get so that’s very big fan of the boats this one is much more basic than this one but I still quite like this one they definitely know what they’re doing so that’s pretty cool and the dock as well I really like this feature of the island

I’m not going to lie oh this thing God how much time did I put into this but here is every single armor trimming that I can get excluding mine but I guess I could stand like that and look at that disappointed I couldn’t get the rest of

Them but you know what the fact is I got these I feel like it’s really really impressive considering where I started you got the nether portal which it’s a nether portal and you got the lava thing which was for the stride up the rer obviously is gone Dr Haven and’s build

His home his his place lovely little place for Dr havenhand yeah he’s now he’s now retired from this place good on him the pig stank dance area oh it looks so much better even though it kind of looks like the ISR run but we move on I’m only halfway done with the island

Turn ignite the Axel he’s still for some weird reason he always like sits in this corner or one of the corners and just stays there forever so you know go him the enchant setup I haven’t touched that in Forever design wise this I think I

Made in 200 days and this has been I’ve probably been in this building more than any other the storage area has been fantastic for me little Among Us guy didn’t really do anything with him either but you know just to have him on the island is kind of cool my semi-auto

F oh God this thing like I say in future videos I made this so much better but like it always worked it always like was it did exactly what I wanted it to do I just had to replant it but the cactus F I never even touched the cactus it only

Ended up getting me didn’t even get me two stacks in the end so you know was even that good the bamboo farm this thing still got barely any bamboo in it and the grand scheme of things but we’re fine the chicken thing they did what I

Wanted to do I guess this thing is the greatest thing I’ve ever built in Minecraft the iron farm has been spectacular for me the sugarcane farm has also been pretty good the creeper farm and to be fair there’s Fireball gunpowder in there now so you know that’s something multi-layered Beacon

Not too shabby if I do say so myself finally the Hall of Haven I’ll go in there in a second but for now I think I need to sleep and uh you know do one last day because day 999 is about to end we’re about to hit the promised land the

Day that I never thought I would reach when I started this here we go look at that day 99 it’s right there wait for it wait for it day 1,000 well I guess there’s two L things to look at and then we can finally end

This once and for all I didn’t show too much of the Hall of Haven just because you know there’s not really too much to it I just want to put down some cool statistics and everything that I did what I have done is I’ve got these item

Frames and what I’m going to do is I’m just going to P that gear and tools in there we’ll have the elyra and the bow there you go that’s all that’s all the main stuff that I used the armor I just don’t need it anymore oh I’m still

Wearing the Haven skin ignore that ignore that guys it’s it’s not guys it’s not Dr Haven it’s cosplay guys it’s cosplay there you go that’s that some of the stats are pretty like when the episode started and when I got them uploaded which is pretty cool some of

Them is like how long I’ve played how many views and likes it’s got if you want to like look at all of them you can uh maybe come on to this world which I’ll get to in a little bit I am going to hold this here just in case you never

Know what’s what might sneak up on me look at me walking on naked again ignore ignore the cosplay guys it’s just a cosplay and that means there is only one last thing to do one last thing to do I guess two technically uh maybe even

Three you we got three last things to do and then we can finally close off this chapter in our in our YouTube career uh and that is to take the monil all the way around again I’m going to turn you down because you are very loud should

Work perfectly fine but we can actually get an outside look of this island and just everything that I’ve done with it I mean this this particular video has been going on for so so long like I’m finishing this and I’m confident it’s going to take me two three weeks to

Upload it I mean this is July 1st to give you an idea it’s July 1st when I finished recording uploading wise I a’t got a clue sometime at the end of July I assume my entire uh backup of videos that I’ve had whether it be the uh

Trimming video or the uh I had the circle video AI I had a bunch of different stuff than that’s all now uploaded so basically after this video comes out I don’t have any 100 days recorded so you know what give me give me a second for the next video mayy

Please don’t leave the channel just cuz this is over I’ve got lots of stuff still planned I guess as we go around and look at all this you know I’m really actually happy that I added this of all things I feel like this was a good

Addition to the island you know I left my pickaxe it was going to be such a pain to get this off you can see all the beacons in the sky there’s what you can see what six beacons from here which is kind of crazy to to think about I think

When it comes down to day 1000 even though the final what 15 days I bet did anything I pretty much just stood around and waited I still think that I did everything that I wanted to do in this world and and more I thought this was

Going to be a one off 100 days video call it a day and then move on to the next series and instead it’s the most popular video on my channel by far it’s it’s not even close like the second most viewed video was Sky Block it had like

1.8 million and I’m like there’s there’s no video that will ever catch up to that and now Sky Block is setting about a million views behind the 1.20 survival island that’s kind of cool so I hope you liked the tour that was everything that

I did uh which gets me to the last two things that I want to do you to find a good spot here a good quiet spot and that is I want to say a couple of thank yous the first person I want to thank is my good editor gaymond when I decided to

Go to 1,000 it wasn’t possible for me to do it was too much work and so I got in touch with gmond who used to edit for me and I was like great I can’t do this can I rehire you just for this little period

To do this and they with open arms just like yeah let’s do this and the amount of work work that they have put in is crazy so gray thank you so much for all your help if you want to say something or put some on screen now you’re more than welcome To please go check out greymond on Twitch twitch.tv/ greatscape I will leave a link in the description so please go check them out when they do stream they are a really good streamer just no promises when they do stream cuz uh spoiler Al know very often Grace

Definitely going to roast me for that one also maybe check out my streams I would like to do some more streaming in the near future so but both of them will be in the description but gray should be the priority cuz the amount of work that

Gray has done in the past oh God couple of months is outrageous so you know gr I know you watch this I really appreciate all you’ve done thank you so much for your help great and the viewer you you in 20123 I made a big change to my life

This became my full-time job and the support that I’ve got in 2023 alone has been Sensational and this is the series that’s done it so seriously if you started on day 100 and you are now watching this moment I thank you because just watch ing the videos is enough for me to get

Paid no it supports Channel a lot whether you liked or comment or anything even if you’ve got annoyed about golden apples or aelia trees or how the island looks like India or there’s no crops but there with sugar you know whether you liked it or not it was still a really

Good series for me to make and that pretty much ends off that I guess there’s only one last thing to do on this island there there we can maybe go on something else and that of course is to dance to some pig step remember when I did this all the

Time ago wait for it seriously everybody thank you so much for watching and supporting the series there still so much more to come even though this series is coming to an end and I’ll see you guys in the next video thank you for watching thank you for supporting the channel and uh yeah

Here’s the 200k oh by the way uh last thing I completely forgot to mention uh do you want the World download do you do you want the to to to look around Haven Survival Island one20 video I’m going to ask for some outrageous 20,000 likes I’ll release a video down the world and

Everything you need know about it yeah all right then let’s L out that’s not some pig step with the upgraded down below

This video, titled ‘I Survived 1000 Days on a SURVIVAL ISLAND in 1.20 Hardcore Minecraft (FULL MOVIE)’, was uploaded by Havenhand on 2024-01-17 20:00:21. It has garnered 8774 views and 427 likes. The duration of the video is 05:34:40 or 20080 seconds.

With 1.21 just around the corner I think it is time to say Goodbye to 1.20. And with that I’ve put all 6 Parts from my 1.20 Survival Island Series into 1 video. It is a long one….but I hope you enjoy never the less.

I Spend 1000 Days in Hardcore Minecraft`s latest version 1.20 on a Survival island. Here`s what happened. A mostly Beach island, the challenge was to spend 1000 days on this island in Hardcore mode.

MASSIVE Shout out to my editor Gray! Please follow them on Twitch and show your love! – https://www.twitch.tv/grayscaped

My links – ‣ Discord: https://discord.gg/6As3nvE ‣ Twitter – https://twitter.com/Havenhand_ ‣ Twitch – https://www.twitch.tv/havenhand

Credit to Luke TheNotable for creating the concept of 100 days in Minecraft, you can find his channel here: https://www.youtube.com/user/Creolesb…

I Survived 100 Days in Hardcore Minecraft and here is what happened. Not Modded Minecraft. No Mods. Not Speedrunner Vs Hunter, More like Survivalist Vs Hunter but to the extreme. Skyblock, One Block, UHC/Ultrahardcore none of these. Just Hardcore Minecraft. #100Days​​ #hardcore #minecraft

  • LEGO Minecraft 2024 Steve & Baby Panda Unboxing

    LEGO Minecraft 2024 Steve & Baby Panda Unboxing LEGO Minecraft 2024 Steve & Baby Panda 30672 Unboxing & Complete Build Introduction In the world of LEGO Minecraft, the set 30672 featuring Steve and Baby Panda is a delightful addition to any builder’s collection. With 35 pieces to assemble, this set promises a fun and engaging building experience. Unboxing and Building The unboxing experience of the LEGO Minecraft set 30672 is filled with anticipation and excitement. As the packaging is carefully opened, the building adventure begins. Steve and the brick-built panda come to life piece by piece, offering a break from the daily grind and a chance to… Read More

  • McDonald’s in Minecraft: Cheezzy Build

    McDonald's in Minecraft: Cheezzy Build Building a McDonald’s in Minecraft: A Tutorial by Cheezzy Are you a fan of fast food and Minecraft? Well, Cheezzy has got you covered with a step-by-step tutorial on how to build a McDonald’s in Minecraft! Get ready to create your very own fast-food joint in the virtual world. Starting the Build Cheezzy kicks off the tutorial by diving into the construction process. Using Minecraft’s Java Edition 1.19.4, the building begins to take shape. With the help of the BSL Shaderpack and the Faithful Resource Pack, the McDonald’s starts to look realistic and vibrant. Decorating the Interior After laying… Read More

  • 2024 Game Releases: PS5, Xbox Series X, PC

    2024 Game Releases: PS5, Xbox Series X, PC New Games Coming Out in 2024: Minecraft 15 Anniversary Exciting Updates Await Minecraft Fans The year 2024 promises to be an exciting one for gamers, especially for Minecraft enthusiasts. The highly anticipated Minecraft 15 Anniversary is set to bring a wave of new features and updates to the beloved sandbox game. With its ever-expanding world and dedicated fan base, Minecraft continues to captivate players of all ages. What to Expect from Minecraft 15 Anniversary Minecraft 15 Anniversary is expected to introduce a plethora of new content, including fresh gameplay mechanics, enhanced graphics, and exciting challenges. Players can look forward… Read More

  • Discover the Excitement of Minewind Minecraft Server!

    Discover the Excitement of Minewind Minecraft Server! Welcome to NewsMinecraft.com, where we bring you the latest and greatest in the world of Minecraft! Today, we stumbled upon a fascinating video titled “マインクラフトでマイクイズ!なにがかわったかわかる?” which showcased a fun spot-the-difference quiz within the Minecraft world. While the video itself may not be directly related to Minewind Minecraft Server, it does highlight the endless possibilities and creativity that Minecraft has to offer. If you’re someone who enjoys exploring new challenges, interacting with a vibrant community, and pushing the boundaries of your imagination, then Minewind Minecraft Server is the perfect place for you. With its unique gameplay features, intense PvP battles,… Read More

  • Minecraft Players Build Civilization

    Minecraft Players Build Civilization Minecraft Empires: A Simulation of Civilization Empires Mode Overview In the latest update of Minecraft, players can now immerse themselves in the Empires mode, where they are divided into two teams. This division creates tension that eventually escalates into all-out war. The strategic gameplay and team dynamics in Empires mode add a new layer of excitement to the Minecraft experience. Join the Community For those looking to dive into the world of Minecraft Empires, joining the official Discord server is a great way to connect with other players, strategize, and stay updated on the latest developments. Click here to… Read More

  • Minecode: Morse Messages in Minecraft

    Minecode: Morse Messages in Minecraft In Minecraft, Morse code is the game, Using bonfires to light up the flame. With smoke signals, messages can be sent, A unique way to communicate, time well spent. No official tutorial, just a creative twist, Using your skills, in the game you persist. So grab your blocks and start to build, A new way to play, your creativity fulfilled. Support the adventure, with Amazon link in hand, Keep the fire burning, across the land. Follow on Twitter, for updates and more, In the world of Minecraft, let your imagination soar. Read More

  • Burj Al Arab Makeover – Minecraft Madness

    Burj Al Arab Makeover - Minecraft Madness Transforming the Burj Al Arab! – Minecraft Transformations Minecraft enthusiasts are constantly pushing the boundaries of creativity within the game. One such project that has caught the attention of many is the transformation of the iconic Burj Al Arab in Minecraft. Let’s delve into the details of this impressive endeavor! Building the Burj Al Arab The Burj Al Arab, known for its sail-shaped silhouette, is a luxurious hotel located in Dubai. In Minecraft, players have taken on the challenge of recreating this architectural marvel block by block. The attention to detail in replicating the unique design and intricate features… Read More

  • Ultimate Dragon Ball Server: Super Saiyan Transformation!

    Ultimate Dragon Ball Server: Super Saiyan Transformation! Minecraft Dragon Ball Ultimate Server: Super Saiyan Transformation Join the adventure in the Dragon Ball Ultimate series, the top server for Dragon Ball on Minecraft Bedrock edition. In this episode, our protagonist transforms into a Super Saiyan, showcasing the exciting gameplay this server has to offer. Stay tuned for more! Server Information For those eager to dive into the action, here are the details you need to join the Dragon Ball Ultimate server: IP: jogar.redeblacky.com Port: 1932 Connect to the server and unleash your inner warrior as you explore the world of Dragon Ball in Minecraft. Tutorial: Becoming a… Read More

  • Crafting a Friendly Ostrich Portal in Minecraft

    Crafting a Friendly Ostrich Portal in Minecraft Minecraft: Exploring the Friendly Ostrich Portal (Zoonomaly) Embark on a thrilling Minecraft adventure as you delve into the fascinating world of the Friendly Ostrich Portal in the Zoonomaly realm. Join the exploration and uncover the secrets that await! Discovering the Zoonomaly Realm Step into the Zoonomaly realm, a mystical land filled with wonders and mysteries. Navigate through lush forests, towering mountains, and vast oceans as you embark on an epic journey to find the Friendly Ostrich Portal. Unveiling the Friendly Ostrich Portal As you traverse the Zoonomaly realm, keep an eye out for the elusive Friendly Ostrich Portal. This… Read More

  • Phone Speed Showdown: Minecraft Cube Xuan Edition

    Phone Speed Showdown: Minecraft Cube Xuan Edition In the world of Minecraft, where blocks reign supreme, Cube Xuan brings joy, like a delightful dream. Charging speed comparison, mobile phones in the mix, With humor and fun, he crafts his tricks. Child-friendly content, with safety in mind, Cube Xuan’s animations, one of a kind. Avoiding the pirated, staying true to his name, Bringing happiness daily, it’s all part of the game. So follow along, for a daily dose of glee, Cube Xuan’s channel, the place to be. Minecraft facts and fun, in every rhyme, Join the adventure, it’s always a good time. Read More

  • Minecraft Battle of the Sexes: Boys vs Girls! #lit #minecraft #memes

    Minecraft Battle of the Sexes: Boys vs Girls! #lit #minecraft #memes “Why do Minecraft boys always have diamond armor and enchanted weapons, while Minecraft girls are just out here collecting flowers and building cute houses? It’s like they’re playing two completely different games!” #MinecraftGenderDisparities Read More

  • Join Minewind Server for Epic Minecraft Adventures!

    Join Minewind Server for Epic Minecraft Adventures! Welcome to Newsminecraft.com, where we bring you the latest and greatest in the world of Minecraft! Today, we stumbled upon a fascinating YouTube video titled “I BUILT ENDER DRAGON IN MINECRAFT 1.2 | MEMBERS SPECIAL | Epitome Gaming #minecraft #minecraftshorts.” While the video itself may not be about Minewind Minecraft Server, it certainly got us thinking – what if you could unleash your creativity and build something truly epic on a server like Minewind? Imagine a world where you can push the boundaries of what’s possible in Minecraft, collaborate with like-minded players, and embark on thrilling adventures. That’s the… Read More

  • Awkward Moments in Minecraft!

    Awkward Moments in Minecraft! Minecraft: The Embarrassment of Opening the Wrong Door! Welcome to the world of Minecraft where unexpected adventures await at every turn. Join the fun and excitement as you navigate through the blocky landscapes and encounter hilarious mishaps along the way. Unlocking the Laughter Imagine the laughter that ensues when a character opens the wrong door in Minecraft. From unexpected surprises to comical encounters, every moment is filled with joy and amusement. The game’s unpredictable nature keeps players on their toes, ready for whatever may come their way. Turning Mistakes into Memorable Moments Even opening the wrong door can lead… Read More

  • UNLOCKING LVL 444 SECRETS in Minecraft Skyblock!

    UNLOCKING LVL 444 SECRETS in Minecraft Skyblock!Video Information uh all right cool bot RZ just join the channel shut the [ __ ] up NBO uh I will keep my camera off right now just because I came home and had the [ __ ] so I just said [ __ ] it and went ahead and took a shower anyway I was going to do that I was going to do that later and anyway like before I went to bed but [ __ ] [Music] it so I got the uh I got my fan on me right now so um yeah I I… Read More

  • Hypixel Ruined Block Clutch

    Hypixel Ruined Block ClutchVideo Information This video, titled ‘HYPIXEL RUINED THIS BLOCK CLUTCH! #bridgeduels #hypixel #minecraft #shorts’, was uploaded by Good Guy Sly on 2024-04-16 20:15:01. It has garnered 2347 views and 38 likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:17 or 17 seconds. Experience the ultimate ASMR clicking sounds in this action-packed Minecraft video featuring Hypixel Duels, Bedwars, PvP, and more! Dive into the world of Hypixel Bridge and witness epic block clutches and intense battles. Whether you’re a seasoned player or a newbie, this video is sure to keep you on the edge of your seat. Join us on YouTube for… Read More

  • “Ultimate Clickbait: Rainbow Noob Summons Roblox Smileys in Minecraft 😱” #shorts

    "Ultimate Clickbait: Rainbow Noob Summons Roblox Smileys in Minecraft 😱" #shortsVideo Information huh [Music] H woo wow oh my God no God no God please no [Music] what wow This video, titled ‘Never Summon Roblox Innyume Smiley’s Stylized in Minecraft…. 😨 #shorts #minecraft’, was uploaded by Rainbow Noob on 2024-04-19 13:48:02. It has garnered 17763 views and 809 likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:27 or 27 seconds. Never Summon Roblox Innyume Smiley’s Stylized in Minecraft…. 😨 #shorts #minecraft #minecraftanimation #animation Subscribe to the channel so as not to miss the video! Read More

  • ULTIMATE XP FARM – RULER TAKES ON ASSASSIN IN MINECRAFT 🔥🔪 || #minecraft #survival

    ULTIMATE XP FARM - RULER TAKES ON ASSASSIN IN MINECRAFT 🔥🔪 || #minecraft #survivalVideo Information तो हेलो गाइ स्वागत है सभी का 100 डेज सर्वाइवल वीडियो के डे नंबर नाइन पे तो भाई पिछले वाले वीडियो में हम लोग गए थे नेदर फोर्ट्रेस में और वहां पे भाई हमें ब्लेज रॉड मिला था ब्रो हम लोग के पास टोटल दो ब्लेज रॉड हुए थे और फिर एक स्कल विधर करके कुछ भी मिला था भाई बट वो सबका यूज भाई आगे करेंगे तो भाई लोग आज के वीडियो में हम लोग बनाने वाले हैं अपना एक्सपी फार्म क्योंकि भाई हम लोग का सरवाइवर वर्ल्ड में अभी तक एक भी एक्सपी फार्म नहीं है… Read More

  • Uncover the Ultimate Villager Hide & Seek Strategy! #minecraft #funny

    Uncover the Ultimate Villager Hide & Seek Strategy! #minecraft #funnyVideo Information hey Villager willst du Hiden seek mit mir spielen du bekommst auch 64 Emeralds wenn du gewinnst ich heie Hans okay okay Hans dann versteck dich ich zähle 10 9 6 5 4 3 2 1 ich komme so wo könnte denn Hans sein ist er vielleicht in diesem Gebäude hier drin Hans komm raus bist du hier nee da scheint er wohl nicht drin zu sein Hans bist du vielleicht in diesem Gebäude ah Hans da bist du ja los Hans ich habe dich gefunden du hast verloren Bro du kriegst die Emeralds nicht hey Hans wo… Read More

  • Insane Minecraft Trade Hack with Mobs!

    Insane Minecraft Trade Hack with Mobs!Video Information अरे भाई भाई मा बट आई कैन ट्रेड विद मॉब्स सो गाइस तुम्हारा स्वागत है मेरे न्यू वीडियो में तो गाइस तुमने सुना हां हां मैंने सही बोला एकदम कि वी कैन ट्रेड विद मॉब्स गाइस तो देखो यार अपन मॉब्स के साथ ट्रेड कर सकते हैं और विट द वट ये क्या है बोनस चेस्ट भाई तो एक मिनट बोनस चेस्ट में क्या है ओके एमरल्ड है और ट्रेडिंग आइटम है तो गाइस देखो ये वाली चीज अपने को इने बोनस में दी है क्योंकि ये काम आने वाली है इस चीज में क्योंकि एमरल्ड अप लोग… Read More

  • Canyon Gamerz: INSANE MINECRAFT LOGIC! #minecraftmemes

    Canyon Gamerz: INSANE MINECRAFT LOGIC! #minecraftmemesVideo Information [Music] [Music] for This video, titled ‘USELESS LOGIC IN MINECRAFT #minecraft #minecraftmeme #shorts’, was uploaded by Canyon Gamerz on 2024-04-29 14:45:03. It has garnered 2692 views and 49 likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:40 or 40 seconds. Thanks For Watching Plz Like and Subscribe #minecraft #minecraftmemes #minecraftpe #minecraftonly #minecraftpc #minecrafter #minecraftmeme #minecrafters #minecraftbuilds #minecraftpocketedition #minecraftxbox #minecraftserver #minecraftbuild #minecraftart #minecraftps3 #minecraftuniverse #minecrafts #minecraftdaily #minecraftforever #minecraftskin #minecraftedit #photoseedminecraft #minecraftfx #minecraftdiaries #minecraftskins #skydoesminecraft #minecrafthouse #minecraftcake #minecraftersonly #minecraftparty #minecraftindonesia #minecraftgirl #pewdiepieminecraft #minecraft_pe #minecraftdrawing #minecraftxbox360 #minecraftsurvival #minecraftisawesome #minecrafthouses #minecraftedits #minecraft #memes #meme #dankmemes #minecraftmemes #fortnite #funny #gaming #gamer #funnymemes #memesdaily #minecraftbuilds… Read More

  • Insane Twist in Benjaramire3 Chat & Play!

    Insane Twist in Benjaramire3 Chat & Play!Video Information Hola soy Benja Ramírez 3 Bienvenidos a un nuevo video al al al al al al e al al si es hora de cocinar [Música] B [Música] ah ah [Música] bienvenida mi gente [Música] [Música] acá andamos [Música] bueno [Música] gente vamos a jugar minet [Música] eh No ahí se me bug [Música] bu ah ah H [Música] ha Bueno vamos a ver ahora lo de los aldeanos a ver si es que alguno nos da un encantamiento o protección 4 o eficiencia 5 que por ahora no es el caso por ahora están despiertos los al no… Read More

  • "Caught LartisteCat Losing Mind Over Minecraft Creator!"

    <p>"Caught <em>LartisteCat</em> Losing Mind Over Minecraft Creator!"</p>Video Information This video, titled ‘me when i hear “creator” on minecraft’, was uploaded by LartisteCat on 2024-05-19 00:47:26. It has garnered 197 views and 3 likes. The duration of the video is 00:01:27 or 87 seconds. I vibe with the music, y’know! Plug me into those tunes! You bet I’m gonna be doing this on the upcoming 2024 SMP. Read More

  • MineHammer Network

    MineHammer NetworkMineHammer is a 1.19 Survival Network featuring true Bedrock/Java Cross-Play. – Custom Fish – Weekly Updates – Amazing Community Come see for yourself, join with play.minehammer.com! play.minehammer.com Read More

  • Fabulous Miners SMP Whitelisted Java & Bedrock Non-toxic 1.20.X

    Welcome to our Whitelisted Server! Hello, my name is Alfred and just a week ago, I opened a whitelisted server for my friends and me to play on. Now, the server is open to anyone who can contribute positively and with kindness. Features: Enhanced vanilla mechanisms like sethome and tpa A leveling system for unlocking perks/commands A unique fishing system with new fish (no custom resource pack needed) A server shop for selling items and player chest shops All mobs drop their heads for collection We have other features that make the server enjoyable, but we aim to keep things… Read More

  • Minecraft Memes – Flame War: Flat world survival lit 🔥

    I guess you could say they’re really flat out surviving in that world! Read More

  • Ben 10’s Minecraft Mayhem: S5João’s Addon Adventure!

    Ben 10's Minecraft Mayhem: S5João's Addon Adventure! In the world of Minecraft, a new addon is here, With Ben 10 powers, the game is in high gear. S5João brings the news with a grin and a spin, Every update described with a playful, rhyming spin. From four arms to flames, the action is insane, In this incredible addon, there’s so much to gain. So hit that like, subscribe, and join the fun, With S5João’s updates, the Minecraft journey’s just begun. Read More

  • Spice up your explosions with DIY TNT!

    Spice up your explosions with DIY TNT! To make a new TNT, just mix some gunpowder, sand, and a sprinkle of chaos. Voila, you’ve got yourself a recipe for disaster! #minecraftlogic 😂🧨 Read More

  • The Ultimate Minecraft Shaders Revealed!

    The Ultimate Minecraft Shaders Revealed! The Best Shaders for Minecraft: A Closer Look Introduction Minecraft enthusiasts are always on the lookout for ways to enhance their gaming experience, and one popular method is through shaders. Shaders are mods that can significantly improve the visual appeal of the game, adding realistic lighting, shadows, and textures. Top Shaders for Minecraft If you’re looking to elevate your Minecraft experience, consider checking out some of the best shaders available: – Shader 1: [Link to Shader 1] – Shader 2: [Link to Shader 2] – Minecraft Patch: [Link to Minecraft Patch] Features of Shaders – Improved lighting effects -… Read More

  • Join Minewind: Survive the Scariest Minecraft Adventures!

    Join Minewind: Survive the Scariest Minecraft Adventures! Welcome to NewsMinecraft.com! Today, we stumbled upon a thrilling YouTube video titled “i survive most SCARY 😨 Minecraft………” and it got us thinking – what if you could experience your own heart-pounding adventures in Minecraft? Well, look no further than Minewind Minecraft Server! Minewind offers a unique and exhilarating gameplay experience that will keep you on the edge of your seat. With a diverse community of players and exciting challenges, you’ll never run out of things to do on Minewind. So, if you’re ready to dive into the world of Minecraft and embark on your own thrilling journey, join… Read More

  • Apple Orchard Shenanigans: Reflectcraft

    Apple Orchard Shenanigans: Reflectcraft Welcome to Reflectcraft: Building an Apple Orchard in Minecraft Survival In this episode of Reflectcraft, our protagonist embarks on a mission to create an idyllic farm filled with crops as far as the eye can see. Join them as they explore, build an apple orchard, and review their progress in this Minecraft survival adventure. Exploring and Gathering Resources Our journey begins as we witness our player setting out to build an agricultural district. Running low on food, they decide to create fields of crops to sustain themselves. Armed with a flint and steel, they venture out to gather wheat… Read More

  • YUKITO Goes Crazy in Minecraft!! 😱 #new vtuber #yukisaba

    YUKITO Goes Crazy in Minecraft!! 😱 #new vtuber #yukisabaVideo Information [音楽] DETDET [音楽] [音楽] [音楽] DET [音楽] [音楽] OGOG [音楽] [音楽] あ はいえと皆様こんにちは ますマイクの方ね入ってますね配信の方 開始されてますのね立方配信ということで ちょっとねま画面がブレにぶれまくってる んですけどちょっとね今から修正いたせ ますんでえお待ちくださいまずね顔とかは ここら辺に置い てで上あれすね今日のタイトルこれを今日 はです ね別の拡張 うあ はあれもいねえしうちのサーバーついに 全員落ちたんだけどさっきまで6さっき まで6人ぐらいたの にゆきとが配信開始するの遅すぎなんだよ でねあの実はちょっとねあの本当はね サバイバルでやりたかったんですけど ちょっとさすがに建築物全部どかすのは ちょっと難しいのでちょっと クリエイティブでねあの建築物をあの どかして道幅を6マスにえっと変更をし てこう というのがま今日の目的でござい ますね道幅3マスじゃ狭いんすよね メインの大通りは6マスに変更しようかな ということでそれをね今日やってやって ければなとえっと思っております はいでまず えっとです ねどうしよっか な早速ね考えなきゃいけないところがあっ て あまいいのかいやでもそしたらなここのさ この道をねここ3マスなわけここ6マスに してビルをこっち側に全部1列分こっち側 も移動させ てそうするとねこっち側こっちが正面のね お店とかも何個かあるん でその場合どうしよっかなっていうまあ いっかどっちかの入り口封鎖させてうん いっ か日本語になってないねちこのなべ君 ね滅された こんな感じでじみちにね今日は雑談し ながらビルを移動してくっていうあの配信 でござい ますとんでもなく地味です はいで今日はね配信せずに裏でやろうかな と思ったんです けどあの最近さあの配信サボりすぎてん じゃないですかくさんなんで無理やりでも やらない多分ゆさん今後ね配信をしなく なっちゃうんじゃないかなと いうちょっと心配があったんでちょっと 無理やりでも今日は配信しようという気を 持ってあの本日はえやっており ますさあ配信とえば楽しいんですよ楽しい んだけどやっぱね毎日やらなきゃいけない みたいななんか変なねモチベーションが今 ないんですよ正直 そうベーションがないなかちょっと配信 やってるところあるんですけどなんて言う のか ななんだろうなんかねやっぱななんて言う んだろう言葉にうまく表現できないんだ けどうんなんて言うのかな まいっ かばみんな今日寒かった ね皆様の地域はどうでした東京なんかさ夜 になったらすごい寒くなって さびっっくりしちゃったよ本当にめさんも こんばんはマジ でチャリンコ用事があってチリンたんだ けどさ寒くさ 帰りそうマック食いに行ってたんですけど 帰り寒くて薄切で行ってたんですけど寒 みたいなそんな感じでしたね じ最近なんか天気の温度差が激しすぎだよ ねマジで異常気象だよ本当にみ常気象だ よ最近マジで温度差が 激しいなんか今年の夏はすごい暑くなる らしいけどね今は寒い けどどうなんだろう ねどうなるのか気になるよね今後ね日本 なんか今年はなんか暑い夏になるらしい から… Read More

  • Dancing to the HB Beat

    Dancing to the HB BeatVideo Information bu girl in [Musik] the This video, titled ‘Dance!! #minecraft #shorts’, was uploaded by HB on 2024-03-16 02:41:19. It has garnered 10828 views and likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:12 or 12 seconds. minecraft, j and mikey, maizen, mikey andj, ij and mikey minecraft, minecraftj and mikey, maizen minecraft, j and mikey roblox, siren head, shorts, minecraft ghost, roblox, mikey and j minecraft, sonic, choo choo charles, maizen roblox, sakura, granny, herobrine, jj mikey, chainsaw man, minecraft shorts, minecraft minecraft, choo-choo-charles, jj and mikey minecraft 100 days, minecraft mikey and j, monster school, tiktok, obit, mikey… Read More

  • All My Fellas Conquering Bedwars 😎🔥

    All My Fellas Conquering Bedwars 😎🔥Video Information my all my all my my all my my This video, titled ‘ALL MY FELLAS 😎 | #shorts #minecraft #bedwars’, was uploaded by Tee2w on 2024-01-10 14:47:24. It has garnered 11020 views and 205 likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:21 or 21 seconds. #tags its soo cool subscribe for ur mom, and enjoy! minecraft,hypixel,skywars,minecraft mods,minecraft challenge,handcam,mousecam,keyboard asmr,keyboard sounds,keyboard and mouse,mouse sounds,keyboard and mouse sounds minecraft,glorious model o,itzGlimpse,bedwars,hypixel bedwars,keyboard and mouse sounds bedwars,ducky one 2 mini,butterfly clicking,bed wars asmr,keyboard and mouse sounds,bedwars asmr,dragclick,clicky,asmr,family friendly,bedwars with handcam,iAim,modded keyboard,gamakay tk68,thocky keyboard ( from Atlar clips ) Found This Desc… Read More

  • ULTIMATE Minecraft Survival Guide | EP 01 | 2024 H A S H I Y A | Click NOW

    ULTIMATE Minecraft Survival Guide | EP 01 | 2024 H A S H I Y A | Click NOWVideo Information yo yo yo what’s up boys and for [Music] guy [Music] speee [Music] [Music] [Music] go [Music] [Music] [Music] to [Music] [Music] fore [Music] [Applause] [Music] for [Applause] [Music] for [Music] [Music] for [Music] for 1 fore spee fore fore for banana [Music] banana [Music] [Music] for spe [Laughter] fore [Music] for [Music] m bloo I say you say no he [Music] [Music] for speee [Music] fore for for [Music] for for welcome to my party we’re just getting started a life is a dream or a nightmare scaring hand me a drink cuz I think I’m going… Read More

  • Ultimate Minecraft TNT Sword Tutorial! #epic

    Ultimate Minecraft TNT Sword Tutorial! #epicVideo Information [Applause] he This video, titled ‘TNT#minecraft #geming #supportme’, was uploaded by START _SWORD on 2024-03-02 12:03:47. It has garnered 25 views and 0 likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:21 or 21 seconds. Read More

  • Join us in exploring Minecraft Marketplace with DZRKNSS!

    Join us in exploring Minecraft Marketplace with DZRKNSS!Video Information all right I had to like set up a thing darkness is going to be back soon I’m going to put my oh you’re back okay yeah I’m live okay I put on the thing oh Minecraft crashed that’s weird they have a different stream yeah only a little bit different going to just move this there you go [Music] oops wrong thing just gring Hive okay Darkness so you L okay now he’s gone is that yes okay uh yay I love chaos oh my gosh any villagers where are the villagers spawn next guys okay we… Read More

  • INSANE Minecraft 2024 Update Discovery ft. IbxCat, Pixlriffs & Ulraf!

    INSANE Minecraft 2024 Update Discovery ft. IbxCat, Pixlriffs & Ulraf!Video Information ibx toy cat pixel reefs ulra and me got together on April 1st 2024 to play the new Minecraft April fools update a lot of crazy potato stuff happened that day and this is how it all started we have zian with us in chat which is going to be helpful oh hello it’s going to be our guide like in previous like in previous occasions yeah yeah yeah kind of like our guide but also like having fun at us but also on Nemesis at the same time not the necessarily should listen to him but he… Read More

  • Join the SHIZO 360° Experience! 🌀

    Join the SHIZO 360° Experience! 🌀Video Information money money green green money is all I need need money money green green money is all I need need money money green green money is all I need need money money green green money is all I need need money money green green money is all I need like a king cash rules everything around me n tremble to their feet when I step into the sea how I make this scen tell them that it’s in my This video, titled ‘360°, the perfect circle’, was uploaded by smellish on 2024-03-31 21:09:19. It has garnered 59 views… Read More

  • Insane Minecraft Fusion Remix Ft. Zoro & Luck ✨

    Insane Minecraft Fusion Remix Ft. Zoro & Luck ✨Video Information tuim prends-moi dans tes bras et je n’ai plus personne ne laisse pas ton odeur impr et si tu m’abandonnes je suis pas celle que tu croisun m’ touch part [Musique] toi [Musique] cococ je suis [Musique] unetine cocaï ma FEM je suis une clandestine une clandestine ami ami This video, titled ‘”Minecraft Sonic Fusion: Clandestina (JVSTIN Remix) with Reverse Drop 🍀🍇”‘, was uploaded by zoro X luck on 2024-01-06 13:35:00. It has garnered 2361 views and 65 likes. The duration of the video is 00:00:38 or 38 seconds. “Minecraft Sonic Fusion: Clandestina (JVSTIN Remix) with Reverse Drop… Read More

  • Avalon SMP 1.19 MMORPG Dungeons Classes Questing

    Server Trailer: Watch Here TikTok: Check it out Server IP: defend.avalon.today Avalon is Under Attack! You are a Guardian. Avalon is under attack, and you have been summoned. Join a kingdom or create your own. Will you conquer the Great Evil? About Avalon: Avalon is an mmoRPG inspired by games like Diablo, Skyrim, Destiny, and World of Warcraft. With over 90 plugins, 300 NPCs, 6 Chapters, and more, it offers a unique gameplay experience. Features: Become a Warrior, Mage, Rogue, and more NPC-based Questing Dungeons and Raid Bosses Custom Skills, Armor, Weapons, and Crafting Co-operative Towny environment Global Market system… Read More